<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Valeram</id>
		<title>Help Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Valeram"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Special:Contributions/Valeram"/>
		<updated>2026-10-01T17:01:56Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.26.3</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Category:Training_and_Help&amp;diff=39435</id>
		<title>Category:Training and Help</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Category:Training_and_Help&amp;diff=39435"/>
				<updated>2019-12-11T16:07:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;help&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Getting Help'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[Students]]:'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[:Category:2019-2020|Workshop Outlines]] (current year)'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''General technology help:''' go to the [http://www.evergreen.edu/computing/academiccomp/home.htm Computer Center] 360-867-6227, or [http://rails.evergreen.edu/contact/?site=ac-computing-help&amp;amp;recipient=acadcomphelp&amp;amp;tt=true&amp;amp;subject=Email%20from%20the%20Help%20Docs%20Wiki%20 email us]. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Scientific computing:''' contact the [http://www.evergreen.edu/technology/cal Computer Applications Lab (CAL)]&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Instructional Media help''' is available at [https://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/ Media Loan] and at the [https://www.evergreen.edu/electronicmedia/multimedialab Multimedia Lab]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[Faculty and Staff |Faculty &amp;amp; Staff]]:'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://help.evergreen.edu Submit a help ticket] or contact the Technology Support Center (TSC) at 360-867-6627 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Below you find links to articles related to Getting technology help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Category:Training_and_Help&amp;diff=39434</id>
		<title>Category:Training and Help</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Category:Training_and_Help&amp;diff=39434"/>
				<updated>2019-12-11T16:07:29Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;help&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Getting Help'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[Students]]:'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[[:Category:2019-2020|Workshop Outlines]] (current year)'''&lt;br /&gt;
*'''General technology help:''' go to the [http://www.evergreen.edu/computing/academiccomp/home.htm Computer Center] 360-867-6227, or [http://rails.evergreen.edu/contact/?site=ac-computing-help&amp;amp;recipient=acadcomphelp&amp;amp;tt=true&amp;amp;subject=Email%20from%20the%20Help%20Docs%20Wiki%20 email us]. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Scientific computing:''' contact the [http://www.evergreen.edu/technology/cal Computer Applications Lab (CAL)]&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Media Services help''' is available at [https://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/ Media Loan] and at the [https://www.evergreen.edu/electronicmedia/multimedialab Multimedia Lab]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''[[Faculty and Staff |Faculty &amp;amp; Staff]]:'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://help.evergreen.edu Submit a help ticket] or contact the Technology Support Center (TSC) at 360-867-6627 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Below you find links to articles related to Getting technology help.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Top]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Pentax_645Z_Digital_Medium_Format_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=38784</id>
		<title>Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Pentax_645Z_Digital_Medium_Format_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=38784"/>
				<updated>2019-06-07T17:57:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* INFO BUTTON */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:vimeo|156335553|800|center|Pentax 645Z - Basic Functions}}&lt;br /&gt;
==INTRODUCTION==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 645Z is a digital medium format camera. It is equipped with a 51.4MP censor, which was designed without an anti-aliasing filter to maximize sharpness and details. Its wide ISO range provides low noise, low light capability, and the image processor allows for fast image capture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is the only one of its kind at Media Loan, and access to it is very limited.  Only certain approved photography classes are permitted to use it.  A proficiency test is required to use it, after users obtained their DSLR camera and 6D Digital camera. [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/Pentax_645Z_Medium_Format_Proficiency_Test Test and equipment information can be found here.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:IMG 0125.jpeg|thumb|left|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:IMG 0130.jpg|thumb|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MEDIUM FORMAT===&lt;br /&gt;
Simply put, a medium format camera has a larger sensor than other standard DSLR cameras.  A bigger sensor means bigger pixel size, which means better quality. The Pentax 645Z has 3-4x more frame surface than sensors equipped on Canon Rebel DSLRs, which means stills taken with the Pentax can be enlarged significantly without losing quality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format cameras also have no perspective distortion - images taken more closely resemble the way the human eye sees the real world.  The field of view is much wider than other cameras with standard cropped sensors. Let's say you're shooting on a 6x7 medium format camera with a 50mm lens.  If you compare your images to a 35mm camera (also with a 50mm lens), the field of view will be different.  The medium format pictures will actually see what a 24mm lens on a 35mm camera would see.  Simply put: the larger the format, the wider angle your lenses become. You can shoot a wide scene but it will have the &amp;quot;real-world&amp;quot; look of a lens with a longer focal length.  The subject remains proportional and not &amp;quot;stretched-out&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SPECIFICATIONS==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sensor'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
43.8 x 32.8 mm CMOS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Color Depth'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPEG: 8 bits/channel&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: 14 bits/channel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Effective Pixels / Total Pixels'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
51.4MP / 52.99MP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''File Formats'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Stills: RAW (PEF/DNG), TIFF, JPEG (Exif 2.30), DCF2.0 compliant&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 (MOV) *Motion JPEG (AVI) for Interval Movie Record&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Image Resolution'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPEG: L (51M: 8256 x 6192), M (36M: 6912 x 5184), S (21M: 5376 x 4032), XS (3M:1920 x 1440)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: L (51M: 8256 x 6192)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TIFF: L (51M: 8256 x 6192)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Video Resolution'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Full HD: (1920x1080, 60i/50i/30p/25p/24p)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
HD: (1280x720, 60p/50p/30p/25p/24p)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lens Mount'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pentax 645AF2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Shutter Speeds'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Auto: 1/4000 to 30 sec.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Manual: 1/4000 to 30 sec.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bulb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Burst Rate'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 fps, JPEG: up to 30 frames&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: up to 10 frames&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TIFF: up to 12 frames&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''ISO Sensitivity'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 – 204,800&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==KIT CONTENTS==&lt;br /&gt;
*Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Batteries (2)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*128GB Memory Card&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMC Pentax-FA 645 1:2.8 75mm Prime Lens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMC Pentax-A 645 1:4 120mm Macro Lens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Lens Hoods (2, Metal &amp;amp; Silicon)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Battery Charger&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CARE==&lt;br /&gt;
Please do not attempt to clean sensitive parts of this camera, such as the mirror and sensor, yourself.  If these need to be cleaned, please bring them to Media Loan so that we may assist you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====DO NOT====&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_front.png|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Front Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_back.jpg|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Back Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_bottom.jpg|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Bottom Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
Drop this camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point towards the sun&lt;br /&gt;
Expose to extreme weather conditions&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store/use in extreme temperatures&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store near corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clean the censor or mirror yourself&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use excessive force&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave unattended&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave camera near a strong magnetic field&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Submerge this camera in water&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==PARTS==&lt;br /&gt;
===DIOPTER===&lt;br /&gt;
The diopter focuses the viewfinder to your individual eyesight to ensure that you obtain proper focus. '''YOU MUST PROPERLY ADJUST THE DIOPTER BEFORE FOCUSING WITH THE LENS.''' Also adjust the diopter for very operator.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To adjust the diopter:''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure no lens is attached (you may confuse the focus of the lens with the focus of the viewfinder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Point the camera at a bright object, but '''NOT THE SUN'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Look through the viewfinder&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the focusing brackets in the viewfinder are in focus.  Turn the ring clockwise for a negative value and counterclockwise for a positive value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MONITOR===&lt;br /&gt;
This monitor can be tilted to viewing preference.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the camera in one hand and the top of the monitor with the other.&lt;br /&gt;
# Slowly lower until it stops&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the monitor to lift it upward&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the angle accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===EXTERIOR CONTROLS===&lt;br /&gt;
Click images to enlarge.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_controls_front.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_controls_back.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Shutter Release''' &lt;br /&gt;
# '''ISO''' &lt;br /&gt;
# '''EV Compensation'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Main switch:''' Move to turn the power on/off.  The symbol of the right is Depth of Field Preview, and will display accurate focusing depending on aperture in the viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Front e-dial:''' Changes the values for camera settings such as exposure; switch menu categories; image selection&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Lens unlock:''' Press to detach the lens&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Metering Mode Dial:''' Changes the metering mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Lock:''' Temporarily disables e-dial and button operation&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF (auto-focus) Area:''' Press to change the AF point&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Exposure Bracketing'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''RAW/Fx:''' You can assign a function to this button&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mode Dial Lock'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mode Dial:''' Changes the exposure mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Stills/Movie Switch Dial:''' Switchings between still capture and move recording modes&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Rear e-dial:''' Changes the values to camera settings such as exposure; switch menu tabs; change camera settings; magnify images&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF Mode Dial:''' Switches AF modes (AF.S/C)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mirror Up Dial:''' Enables shooting with the mirror raised&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Illumination:''' Illuminates LCD panel&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AE Lock:''' Locks exposure value; saves JPEG to RAW&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF:''' Available for adjusting focus, instead of pressing shutter release halfway&lt;br /&gt;
# '''OK'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Four-way Controller:''' Displays the Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance or Custom Image setup menu; move cursor or selected list item&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF Point Change/Card Slow Switch:''' Press to enable changing AF point; switch memory cards in playback mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Green:''' Reset the values being adjusted; switches to ISO AUTO&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Live View/REC/Delete:''' Displays Live View image on monitor; stars/stops recording in movie move; delete images during playback&lt;br /&gt;
# '''INFO:''' Changes style of display on monitor&lt;br /&gt;
# '''MENU'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Playback'''&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====FOUR-WAY CONTROLLER====&lt;br /&gt;
The Four-way Controller (22) is the main way to access major settings. Pressing the buttons on the Four-Way Controller will activate the following:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Top:''' Drive Modes&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Bottom:''' Flash Modes&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Right:''' Custom Image&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Left:''' White Balance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO BUTTON===&lt;br /&gt;
In '''Standby''' or '''Live View''', press the '''INFO''' button to access various camera settings, such as: &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Highlight Correction:''' reduces occurence of overexposure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Shadow Correction:''' reduces occurence of underexposure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Distortion Correction:''' reduces distortion due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adjustment:''' reduces lateral chromatic abberations due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Peripheral Illumination Correction:''' reduces peripheral light fall-off occurring due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Diffraction Correction:''' corrects the diffraction when the aperture is small.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''HDR:''' takes three consecutive images at three different exposure levels to create a single composite picture.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Memory card options:''' selects one of the two inserted memory card (Media Loan only provides one).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''File format options:''' change the file format.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''JPEG Resolutions:''' change the JPEG resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Noise Reduction:'''  High-ISO NR sets the noise reduction setting when shooting with a high ISO. Slow Shutter Speed NR sets how the noise reduction setting functions during long exposures.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''AF Area:''' set the auto-focus area.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Focus Peaking (only when Live View is activated):''' emphasizes (sharpens) the outline of the subject in focus to make it easier to check for proper focus&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press '''INFO''' again to exit screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you are in viewing mode, press '''INFO''' button  to be given the option to select a preferred display screen: &lt;br /&gt;
* Status Screen&lt;br /&gt;
* Electronic Level&lt;br /&gt;
* Display Off&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU BUTTON===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the MENU button to change camera settings.  Use the '''Four-Way Controller, Front e-dial''' and '''Rear e-dial''' to navigate.&lt;br /&gt;
* Camera tabs: Here you can adjust settings such as memory card options, HDR, Preview settings, button customization, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Video tab: Adjust movie capture settings, video exposure settings, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Playback tab: Adjust image display options in playback mode&lt;br /&gt;
* Wrench tabs: Make system adjustments such as date/time, LCD display options, etc. Also use to format memory cards. '''Always format the memory cards prior to return at Media Loan.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LENS ATTACHMENT==&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the camera is off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the body mount cap. Press down the '''Lens Unlock''' button (3) and remove cap.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align the lens mount index (red dots) on the body and lens, and turn the lens clockwise. Do not press the lens unlock at this time.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To remove:''' Turn the lens counterclockwise while holding down the lens unlock button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QUICK EXPOSURE GUIDE==&lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to change you exposure settings (shutter speed, aperture, ISO) with this camera. Use the below guide as a quick reference to control these settings. These can be used with or without '''Live View''' activated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shutter Speed: '''Front e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Aperture: '''Rear e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* ISO: Press the '''ISO''' button, then adjust with '''Rear e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' with the included lenses, the aperture can be changed on the aperture ring.  To enable aperture manipulation in the camera, you must set the ring to A. To do this, press the button on the aperture ring and turn the ring to the green A position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==AUTO-FOCUS==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Auto-Focus (AF) cannot be used with the 120mm lens included in the kit.''' To enable AF with the 75mm prime, turn the switch on the lens from MF (manual focus) to AF.&lt;br /&gt;
* To engage auto-focus, depress the '''Shutter Release''' halfway until the lens is done focusing. You can also use the '''AF button''' to auto-focus.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the area in which the camera is auto-focusing, hold down the '''AF Area''' button during '''Stand-by Mode''' (Live View deactivated) and scroll through the options with the '''Rear e-dial'''. Release, and use the '''Four-Way Controller buttons''' to change the position of the auto-focus area with the selected AF setting.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the position of the auto-focus without changing the AF area, press the '''AF Point Change''' button in Stand-by Mode and use the '''Four-Way Controller buttons'''.  Press the '''AF Point Change''' button again to exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FOCUS PEAKING==&lt;br /&gt;
When Focus Peaking is on, the outline of the subject in focus is emphasized (sharpened).  This makes it easier to check the focus.  Focus peaking works in both AF and MF modes.  To turn on focus peaking, press the INFO button and navigate to &amp;quot;Focus Peaking&amp;quot; when Live View is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==WHITE BALANCE==&lt;br /&gt;
This camera has multiple white balance presets.  &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To change the white balance setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''left button on the Four-Way Controller'''.  The White Balance setting screen will appear on the monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your White Balance. The different preset settings have various options.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Fine-tuning presets:'''&lt;br /&gt;
Press '''INFO''' when in white balance to pull up the fine-tuning menu.  You can adjust Green-Magenta with the top/bottom controller buttons, or Blue-amber with the left and right controller buttons. The '''Green''' button resets the adjustment value to default. Press OK when done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====CUSTOM WHITE BALANCE====&lt;br /&gt;
It is recommended to use custom white balance on any DSLR camera. The preset white balance options may come in handy, but only by setting a custom white balance can you be sure that the colors in your images will be accurate.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# With the camera on, fill the frame with a completely white object (such as a piece of paper) in the desired lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the white balance options as described above, and navigate to '''Custom.'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Push the '''Main Switch''' to the '''Preview''' selection. This will set your custom white balance using the white reference within the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CUSTOM IMAGE==&lt;br /&gt;
You can utilize this feature to change the desired picture style with different colors.  If you do not want the camera to change the color of your images, set this to &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot; (no color manipulation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''right button on the Four-Way Controller''' to pull up the Custom Image setting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the desired tone.  Scroll through controller buttons to view options.  You can engage the '''PREVIEW''' button to preview the background image with selected effect.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''INFO''' to pull up the parameter setting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the parameters.  The '''top/bottom controller buttons''' selects parameter, the '''left/right controller buttons''' adjust the value, the '''Front e-dial''' switches contrast, the '''Rear e-dial''' switches sharpness, and the '''Green''' button resets the adjustment value to default.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==EXPOSURE MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
This camera has many exposure mode options. The recommended exposure mode for the majority of photography is '''M (Manual)'''. P, Sv, Tv, Av, and TAv are all semi-automatic exposure modes and, when engaged, the camera will make certain exposure decisions for you (refer to chart below).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Mode Dial''' to change the exposure mode setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:exposure_modes.png|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DRIVE MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Drive Mode''' refers to the capturing mode that images are taken. This camera has many different drive modes. Use the chart below to select your desired drive mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the drive mode, press the '''top button on the Four-way Controller''' and make your selection.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:drive_modes.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==METERING MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Metering''' refers to the built-in light meter in the camera. The light meter determines the amount of light coming into the lens. The Pentax 645Z has multiple metering modes. Use the chart below to select your desired metering mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Metering Mode Dial''', located near the '''Mode Dial''', to switch between the three metering modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Metering.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Pentax_645Z_Digital_Medium_Format_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=38783</id>
		<title>Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Pentax_645Z_Digital_Medium_Format_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=38783"/>
				<updated>2019-06-07T17:55:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* INFO BUTTON */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:vimeo|156335553|800|center|Pentax 645Z - Basic Functions}}&lt;br /&gt;
==INTRODUCTION==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 645Z is a digital medium format camera. It is equipped with a 51.4MP censor, which was designed without an anti-aliasing filter to maximize sharpness and details. Its wide ISO range provides low noise, low light capability, and the image processor allows for fast image capture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is the only one of its kind at Media Loan, and access to it is very limited.  Only certain approved photography classes are permitted to use it.  A proficiency test is required to use it, after users obtained their DSLR camera and 6D Digital camera. [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/Pentax_645Z_Medium_Format_Proficiency_Test Test and equipment information can be found here.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:IMG 0125.jpeg|thumb|left|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:IMG 0130.jpg|thumb|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MEDIUM FORMAT===&lt;br /&gt;
Simply put, a medium format camera has a larger sensor than other standard DSLR cameras.  A bigger sensor means bigger pixel size, which means better quality. The Pentax 645Z has 3-4x more frame surface than sensors equipped on Canon Rebel DSLRs, which means stills taken with the Pentax can be enlarged significantly without losing quality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format cameras also have no perspective distortion - images taken more closely resemble the way the human eye sees the real world.  The field of view is much wider than other cameras with standard cropped sensors. Let's say you're shooting on a 6x7 medium format camera with a 50mm lens.  If you compare your images to a 35mm camera (also with a 50mm lens), the field of view will be different.  The medium format pictures will actually see what a 24mm lens on a 35mm camera would see.  Simply put: the larger the format, the wider angle your lenses become. You can shoot a wide scene but it will have the &amp;quot;real-world&amp;quot; look of a lens with a longer focal length.  The subject remains proportional and not &amp;quot;stretched-out&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SPECIFICATIONS==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sensor'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
43.8 x 32.8 mm CMOS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Color Depth'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPEG: 8 bits/channel&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: 14 bits/channel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Effective Pixels / Total Pixels'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
51.4MP / 52.99MP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''File Formats'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Stills: RAW (PEF/DNG), TIFF, JPEG (Exif 2.30), DCF2.0 compliant&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 (MOV) *Motion JPEG (AVI) for Interval Movie Record&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Image Resolution'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPEG: L (51M: 8256 x 6192), M (36M: 6912 x 5184), S (21M: 5376 x 4032), XS (3M:1920 x 1440)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: L (51M: 8256 x 6192)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TIFF: L (51M: 8256 x 6192)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Video Resolution'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Full HD: (1920x1080, 60i/50i/30p/25p/24p)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
HD: (1280x720, 60p/50p/30p/25p/24p)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lens Mount'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pentax 645AF2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Shutter Speeds'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Auto: 1/4000 to 30 sec.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Manual: 1/4000 to 30 sec.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bulb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Burst Rate'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 fps, JPEG: up to 30 frames&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: up to 10 frames&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TIFF: up to 12 frames&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''ISO Sensitivity'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 – 204,800&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==KIT CONTENTS==&lt;br /&gt;
*Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Batteries (2)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*128GB Memory Card&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMC Pentax-FA 645 1:2.8 75mm Prime Lens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMC Pentax-A 645 1:4 120mm Macro Lens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Lens Hoods (2, Metal &amp;amp; Silicon)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Battery Charger&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CARE==&lt;br /&gt;
Please do not attempt to clean sensitive parts of this camera, such as the mirror and sensor, yourself.  If these need to be cleaned, please bring them to Media Loan so that we may assist you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====DO NOT====&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_front.png|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Front Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_back.jpg|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Back Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_bottom.jpg|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Bottom Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
Drop this camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point towards the sun&lt;br /&gt;
Expose to extreme weather conditions&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store/use in extreme temperatures&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store near corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clean the censor or mirror yourself&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use excessive force&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave unattended&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave camera near a strong magnetic field&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Submerge this camera in water&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==PARTS==&lt;br /&gt;
===DIOPTER===&lt;br /&gt;
The diopter focuses the viewfinder to your individual eyesight to ensure that you obtain proper focus. '''YOU MUST PROPERLY ADJUST THE DIOPTER BEFORE FOCUSING WITH THE LENS.''' Also adjust the diopter for very operator.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To adjust the diopter:''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure no lens is attached (you may confuse the focus of the lens with the focus of the viewfinder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Point the camera at a bright object, but '''NOT THE SUN'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Look through the viewfinder&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the focusing brackets in the viewfinder are in focus.  Turn the ring clockwise for a negative value and counterclockwise for a positive value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MONITOR===&lt;br /&gt;
This monitor can be tilted to viewing preference.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the camera in one hand and the top of the monitor with the other.&lt;br /&gt;
# Slowly lower until it stops&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the monitor to lift it upward&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the angle accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===EXTERIOR CONTROLS===&lt;br /&gt;
Click images to enlarge.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_controls_front.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_controls_back.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Shutter Release''' &lt;br /&gt;
# '''ISO''' &lt;br /&gt;
# '''EV Compensation'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Main switch:''' Move to turn the power on/off.  The symbol of the right is Depth of Field Preview, and will display accurate focusing depending on aperture in the viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Front e-dial:''' Changes the values for camera settings such as exposure; switch menu categories; image selection&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Lens unlock:''' Press to detach the lens&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Metering Mode Dial:''' Changes the metering mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Lock:''' Temporarily disables e-dial and button operation&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF (auto-focus) Area:''' Press to change the AF point&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Exposure Bracketing'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''RAW/Fx:''' You can assign a function to this button&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mode Dial Lock'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mode Dial:''' Changes the exposure mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Stills/Movie Switch Dial:''' Switchings between still capture and move recording modes&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Rear e-dial:''' Changes the values to camera settings such as exposure; switch menu tabs; change camera settings; magnify images&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF Mode Dial:''' Switches AF modes (AF.S/C)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mirror Up Dial:''' Enables shooting with the mirror raised&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Illumination:''' Illuminates LCD panel&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AE Lock:''' Locks exposure value; saves JPEG to RAW&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF:''' Available for adjusting focus, instead of pressing shutter release halfway&lt;br /&gt;
# '''OK'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Four-way Controller:''' Displays the Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance or Custom Image setup menu; move cursor or selected list item&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF Point Change/Card Slow Switch:''' Press to enable changing AF point; switch memory cards in playback mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Green:''' Reset the values being adjusted; switches to ISO AUTO&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Live View/REC/Delete:''' Displays Live View image on monitor; stars/stops recording in movie move; delete images during playback&lt;br /&gt;
# '''INFO:''' Changes style of display on monitor&lt;br /&gt;
# '''MENU'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Playback'''&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====FOUR-WAY CONTROLLER====&lt;br /&gt;
The Four-way Controller (22) is the main way to access major settings. Pressing the buttons on the Four-Way Controller will activate the following:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Top:''' Drive Modes&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Bottom:''' Flash Modes&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Right:''' Custom Image&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Left:''' White Balance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO BUTTON===&lt;br /&gt;
In '''Standby''' or '''Live View''', press the '''INFO''' button to access various camera settings, such as: &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Highlight Correction:''' reduces occurence of overexposure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Shadow Correction:''' reduces occurence of underexposure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Distortion Correction:''' reduces distortion due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adjustment:''' reduces lateral chromatic abberations due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Peripheral Illumination Correction:''' reduces peripheral light fall-off occurring due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Diffraction Correction:''' corrects the diffraction when the aperture is small.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''HDR:''' takes three consecutive images at three different exposure levels to create a single composite picture.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Memory card options:''' selects one of the two inserted memory card (Media Loan only provides one).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''File format options:''' change the file format.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''JPEG Resolutions:''' change the JPEG resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Noise Reduction:'''  High-ISO NR sets the noise reduction setting when shooting with a high ISO. Slow Shutter Speed NR sets how the noise reduction setting functions during long exposures.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''AF Area:''' set the auto-focus area.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Focus Peaking (only when Live View is activated):''' emphasizes (sharpens) the outline of the subject in focus to make it easier to check for proper focus&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press '''INFO''' again to exit screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you are in viewing mode, '''PRESS INFO MODE AGAIN''' to be given the option to select a preferred display screen: &lt;br /&gt;
* Status Screen&lt;br /&gt;
* Electronic Level&lt;br /&gt;
* Display Off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU BUTTON===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the MENU button to change camera settings.  Use the '''Four-Way Controller, Front e-dial''' and '''Rear e-dial''' to navigate.&lt;br /&gt;
* Camera tabs: Here you can adjust settings such as memory card options, HDR, Preview settings, button customization, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Video tab: Adjust movie capture settings, video exposure settings, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Playback tab: Adjust image display options in playback mode&lt;br /&gt;
* Wrench tabs: Make system adjustments such as date/time, LCD display options, etc. Also use to format memory cards. '''Always format the memory cards prior to return at Media Loan.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LENS ATTACHMENT==&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the camera is off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the body mount cap. Press down the '''Lens Unlock''' button (3) and remove cap.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align the lens mount index (red dots) on the body and lens, and turn the lens clockwise. Do not press the lens unlock at this time.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To remove:''' Turn the lens counterclockwise while holding down the lens unlock button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QUICK EXPOSURE GUIDE==&lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to change you exposure settings (shutter speed, aperture, ISO) with this camera. Use the below guide as a quick reference to control these settings. These can be used with or without '''Live View''' activated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shutter Speed: '''Front e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Aperture: '''Rear e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* ISO: Press the '''ISO''' button, then adjust with '''Rear e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' with the included lenses, the aperture can be changed on the aperture ring.  To enable aperture manipulation in the camera, you must set the ring to A. To do this, press the button on the aperture ring and turn the ring to the green A position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==AUTO-FOCUS==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Auto-Focus (AF) cannot be used with the 120mm lens included in the kit.''' To enable AF with the 75mm prime, turn the switch on the lens from MF (manual focus) to AF.&lt;br /&gt;
* To engage auto-focus, depress the '''Shutter Release''' halfway until the lens is done focusing. You can also use the '''AF button''' to auto-focus.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the area in which the camera is auto-focusing, hold down the '''AF Area''' button during '''Stand-by Mode''' (Live View deactivated) and scroll through the options with the '''Rear e-dial'''. Release, and use the '''Four-Way Controller buttons''' to change the position of the auto-focus area with the selected AF setting.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the position of the auto-focus without changing the AF area, press the '''AF Point Change''' button in Stand-by Mode and use the '''Four-Way Controller buttons'''.  Press the '''AF Point Change''' button again to exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FOCUS PEAKING==&lt;br /&gt;
When Focus Peaking is on, the outline of the subject in focus is emphasized (sharpened).  This makes it easier to check the focus.  Focus peaking works in both AF and MF modes.  To turn on focus peaking, press the INFO button and navigate to &amp;quot;Focus Peaking&amp;quot; when Live View is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==WHITE BALANCE==&lt;br /&gt;
This camera has multiple white balance presets.  &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To change the white balance setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''left button on the Four-Way Controller'''.  The White Balance setting screen will appear on the monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your White Balance. The different preset settings have various options.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Fine-tuning presets:'''&lt;br /&gt;
Press '''INFO''' when in white balance to pull up the fine-tuning menu.  You can adjust Green-Magenta with the top/bottom controller buttons, or Blue-amber with the left and right controller buttons. The '''Green''' button resets the adjustment value to default. Press OK when done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====CUSTOM WHITE BALANCE====&lt;br /&gt;
It is recommended to use custom white balance on any DSLR camera. The preset white balance options may come in handy, but only by setting a custom white balance can you be sure that the colors in your images will be accurate.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# With the camera on, fill the frame with a completely white object (such as a piece of paper) in the desired lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the white balance options as described above, and navigate to '''Custom.'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Push the '''Main Switch''' to the '''Preview''' selection. This will set your custom white balance using the white reference within the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CUSTOM IMAGE==&lt;br /&gt;
You can utilize this feature to change the desired picture style with different colors.  If you do not want the camera to change the color of your images, set this to &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot; (no color manipulation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''right button on the Four-Way Controller''' to pull up the Custom Image setting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the desired tone.  Scroll through controller buttons to view options.  You can engage the '''PREVIEW''' button to preview the background image with selected effect.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''INFO''' to pull up the parameter setting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the parameters.  The '''top/bottom controller buttons''' selects parameter, the '''left/right controller buttons''' adjust the value, the '''Front e-dial''' switches contrast, the '''Rear e-dial''' switches sharpness, and the '''Green''' button resets the adjustment value to default.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==EXPOSURE MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
This camera has many exposure mode options. The recommended exposure mode for the majority of photography is '''M (Manual)'''. P, Sv, Tv, Av, and TAv are all semi-automatic exposure modes and, when engaged, the camera will make certain exposure decisions for you (refer to chart below).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Mode Dial''' to change the exposure mode setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:exposure_modes.png|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DRIVE MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Drive Mode''' refers to the capturing mode that images are taken. This camera has many different drive modes. Use the chart below to select your desired drive mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the drive mode, press the '''top button on the Four-way Controller''' and make your selection.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:drive_modes.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==METERING MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Metering''' refers to the built-in light meter in the camera. The light meter determines the amount of light coming into the lens. The Pentax 645Z has multiple metering modes. Use the chart below to select your desired metering mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Metering Mode Dial''', located near the '''Mode Dial''', to switch between the three metering modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Metering.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Pentax_645Z_Digital_Medium_Format_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=38782</id>
		<title>Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Pentax_645Z_Digital_Medium_Format_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=38782"/>
				<updated>2019-06-07T17:53:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* INFO BUTTON */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:vimeo|156335553|800|center|Pentax 645Z - Basic Functions}}&lt;br /&gt;
==INTRODUCTION==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 645Z is a digital medium format camera. It is equipped with a 51.4MP censor, which was designed without an anti-aliasing filter to maximize sharpness and details. Its wide ISO range provides low noise, low light capability, and the image processor allows for fast image capture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is the only one of its kind at Media Loan, and access to it is very limited.  Only certain approved photography classes are permitted to use it.  A proficiency test is required to use it, after users obtained their DSLR camera and 6D Digital camera. [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/Pentax_645Z_Medium_Format_Proficiency_Test Test and equipment information can be found here.]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:IMG 0125.jpeg|thumb|left|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:IMG 0130.jpg|thumb|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MEDIUM FORMAT===&lt;br /&gt;
Simply put, a medium format camera has a larger sensor than other standard DSLR cameras.  A bigger sensor means bigger pixel size, which means better quality. The Pentax 645Z has 3-4x more frame surface than sensors equipped on Canon Rebel DSLRs, which means stills taken with the Pentax can be enlarged significantly without losing quality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format cameras also have no perspective distortion - images taken more closely resemble the way the human eye sees the real world.  The field of view is much wider than other cameras with standard cropped sensors. Let's say you're shooting on a 6x7 medium format camera with a 50mm lens.  If you compare your images to a 35mm camera (also with a 50mm lens), the field of view will be different.  The medium format pictures will actually see what a 24mm lens on a 35mm camera would see.  Simply put: the larger the format, the wider angle your lenses become. You can shoot a wide scene but it will have the &amp;quot;real-world&amp;quot; look of a lens with a longer focal length.  The subject remains proportional and not &amp;quot;stretched-out&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SPECIFICATIONS==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sensor'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
43.8 x 32.8 mm CMOS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Color Depth'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPEG: 8 bits/channel&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: 14 bits/channel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Effective Pixels / Total Pixels'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
51.4MP / 52.99MP&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''File Formats'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Stills: RAW (PEF/DNG), TIFF, JPEG (Exif 2.30), DCF2.0 compliant&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 (MOV) *Motion JPEG (AVI) for Interval Movie Record&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Image Resolution'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
JPEG: L (51M: 8256 x 6192), M (36M: 6912 x 5184), S (21M: 5376 x 4032), XS (3M:1920 x 1440)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: L (51M: 8256 x 6192)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TIFF: L (51M: 8256 x 6192)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Video Resolution'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Full HD: (1920x1080, 60i/50i/30p/25p/24p)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
HD: (1280x720, 60p/50p/30p/25p/24p)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Lens Mount'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pentax 645AF2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Shutter Speeds'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Auto: 1/4000 to 30 sec.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Manual: 1/4000 to 30 sec.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bulb&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Burst Rate'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3 fps, JPEG: up to 30 frames&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
RAW: up to 10 frames&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TIFF: up to 12 frames&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''ISO Sensitivity'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 – 204,800&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==KIT CONTENTS==&lt;br /&gt;
*Pentax 645Z Digital Medium Format Camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Batteries (2)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*128GB Memory Card&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMC Pentax-FA 645 1:2.8 75mm Prime Lens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*SMC Pentax-A 645 1:4 120mm Macro Lens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Lens Hoods (2, Metal &amp;amp; Silicon)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Battery Charger&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CARE==&lt;br /&gt;
Please do not attempt to clean sensitive parts of this camera, such as the mirror and sensor, yourself.  If these need to be cleaned, please bring them to Media Loan so that we may assist you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====DO NOT====&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_front.png|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Front Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_back.jpg|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Back Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_bottom.jpg|300px|thumb|right|Pentax Bottom Parts]]&lt;br /&gt;
Drop this camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point towards the sun&lt;br /&gt;
Expose to extreme weather conditions&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store/use in extreme temperatures&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store near corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Clean the censor or mirror yourself&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use excessive force&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave unattended&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave camera near a strong magnetic field&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Submerge this camera in water&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==PARTS==&lt;br /&gt;
===DIOPTER===&lt;br /&gt;
The diopter focuses the viewfinder to your individual eyesight to ensure that you obtain proper focus. '''YOU MUST PROPERLY ADJUST THE DIOPTER BEFORE FOCUSING WITH THE LENS.''' Also adjust the diopter for very operator.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To adjust the diopter:''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure no lens is attached (you may confuse the focus of the lens with the focus of the viewfinder)&lt;br /&gt;
# Point the camera at a bright object, but '''NOT THE SUN'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Look through the viewfinder&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the focusing brackets in the viewfinder are in focus.  Turn the ring clockwise for a negative value and counterclockwise for a positive value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MONITOR===&lt;br /&gt;
This monitor can be tilted to viewing preference.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the camera in one hand and the top of the monitor with the other.&lt;br /&gt;
# Slowly lower until it stops&lt;br /&gt;
# Hold the monitor to lift it upward&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the angle accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===EXTERIOR CONTROLS===&lt;br /&gt;
Click images to enlarge.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_controls_front.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:pentax_controls_back.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Shutter Release''' &lt;br /&gt;
# '''ISO''' &lt;br /&gt;
# '''EV Compensation'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Main switch:''' Move to turn the power on/off.  The symbol of the right is Depth of Field Preview, and will display accurate focusing depending on aperture in the viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Front e-dial:''' Changes the values for camera settings such as exposure; switch menu categories; image selection&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Lens unlock:''' Press to detach the lens&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Metering Mode Dial:''' Changes the metering mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Lock:''' Temporarily disables e-dial and button operation&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF (auto-focus) Area:''' Press to change the AF point&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Exposure Bracketing'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''RAW/Fx:''' You can assign a function to this button&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mode Dial Lock'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mode Dial:''' Changes the exposure mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Stills/Movie Switch Dial:''' Switchings between still capture and move recording modes&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Rear e-dial:''' Changes the values to camera settings such as exposure; switch menu tabs; change camera settings; magnify images&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF Mode Dial:''' Switches AF modes (AF.S/C)&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Mirror Up Dial:''' Enables shooting with the mirror raised&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Illumination:''' Illuminates LCD panel&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AE Lock:''' Locks exposure value; saves JPEG to RAW&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF:''' Available for adjusting focus, instead of pressing shutter release halfway&lt;br /&gt;
# '''OK'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Four-way Controller:''' Displays the Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance or Custom Image setup menu; move cursor or selected list item&lt;br /&gt;
# '''AF Point Change/Card Slow Switch:''' Press to enable changing AF point; switch memory cards in playback mode&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Green:''' Reset the values being adjusted; switches to ISO AUTO&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Live View/REC/Delete:''' Displays Live View image on monitor; stars/stops recording in movie move; delete images during playback&lt;br /&gt;
# '''INFO:''' Changes style of display on monitor&lt;br /&gt;
# '''MENU'''&lt;br /&gt;
# '''Playback'''&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====FOUR-WAY CONTROLLER====&lt;br /&gt;
The Four-way Controller (22) is the main way to access major settings. Pressing the buttons on the Four-Way Controller will activate the following:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Top:''' Drive Modes&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Bottom:''' Flash Modes&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Right:''' Custom Image&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Left:''' White Balance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===INFO BUTTON===&lt;br /&gt;
In '''Standby''' or '''Live View''', press the '''INFO''' button to access various camera settings, such as: &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Highlight Correction:''' reduces occurence of overexposure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Shadow Correction:''' reduces occurence of underexposure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Distortion Correction:''' reduces distortion due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adjustment:''' reduces lateral chromatic abberations due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Peripheral Illumination Correction:''' reduces peripheral light fall-off occurring due to lens properties.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Diffraction Correction:''' corrects the diffraction when the aperture is small.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''HDR:''' takes three consecutive images at three different exposure levels to create a single composite picture.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Memory card options:''' selects one of the two inserted memory card (Media Loan only provides one).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''File format options:''' change the file format.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''JPEG Resolutions:''' change the JPEG resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Noise Reduction:'''  High-ISO NR sets the noise reduction setting when shooting with a high ISO. Slow Shutter Speed NR sets how the noise reduction setting functions during long exposures.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''AF Area:''' set the auto-focus area.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Focus Peaking (only when Live View is activated):''' emphasizes (sharpens) the outline of the subject in focus to make it easier to check for proper focus&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press '''INFO''' again to exit screen. Now that you are in viewing mode, you will be given the option to select a preferred display screen: Status Screen, Electronic Level, or Display Off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MENU BUTTON===&lt;br /&gt;
Press the MENU button to change camera settings.  Use the '''Four-Way Controller, Front e-dial''' and '''Rear e-dial''' to navigate.&lt;br /&gt;
* Camera tabs: Here you can adjust settings such as memory card options, HDR, Preview settings, button customization, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Video tab: Adjust movie capture settings, video exposure settings, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Playback tab: Adjust image display options in playback mode&lt;br /&gt;
* Wrench tabs: Make system adjustments such as date/time, LCD display options, etc. Also use to format memory cards. '''Always format the memory cards prior to return at Media Loan.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LENS ATTACHMENT==&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure the camera is off.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the body mount cap. Press down the '''Lens Unlock''' button (3) and remove cap.&lt;br /&gt;
# Align the lens mount index (red dots) on the body and lens, and turn the lens clockwise. Do not press the lens unlock at this time.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To remove:''' Turn the lens counterclockwise while holding down the lens unlock button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==QUICK EXPOSURE GUIDE==&lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to change you exposure settings (shutter speed, aperture, ISO) with this camera. Use the below guide as a quick reference to control these settings. These can be used with or without '''Live View''' activated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Shutter Speed: '''Front e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Aperture: '''Rear e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* ISO: Press the '''ISO''' button, then adjust with '''Rear e-dial'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' with the included lenses, the aperture can be changed on the aperture ring.  To enable aperture manipulation in the camera, you must set the ring to A. To do this, press the button on the aperture ring and turn the ring to the green A position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==AUTO-FOCUS==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Auto-Focus (AF) cannot be used with the 120mm lens included in the kit.''' To enable AF with the 75mm prime, turn the switch on the lens from MF (manual focus) to AF.&lt;br /&gt;
* To engage auto-focus, depress the '''Shutter Release''' halfway until the lens is done focusing. You can also use the '''AF button''' to auto-focus.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the area in which the camera is auto-focusing, hold down the '''AF Area''' button during '''Stand-by Mode''' (Live View deactivated) and scroll through the options with the '''Rear e-dial'''. Release, and use the '''Four-Way Controller buttons''' to change the position of the auto-focus area with the selected AF setting.&lt;br /&gt;
* To change the position of the auto-focus without changing the AF area, press the '''AF Point Change''' button in Stand-by Mode and use the '''Four-Way Controller buttons'''.  Press the '''AF Point Change''' button again to exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FOCUS PEAKING==&lt;br /&gt;
When Focus Peaking is on, the outline of the subject in focus is emphasized (sharpened).  This makes it easier to check the focus.  Focus peaking works in both AF and MF modes.  To turn on focus peaking, press the INFO button and navigate to &amp;quot;Focus Peaking&amp;quot; when Live View is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==WHITE BALANCE==&lt;br /&gt;
This camera has multiple white balance presets.  &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To change the white balance setting:&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''left button on the Four-Way Controller'''.  The White Balance setting screen will appear on the monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your White Balance. The different preset settings have various options.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Fine-tuning presets:'''&lt;br /&gt;
Press '''INFO''' when in white balance to pull up the fine-tuning menu.  You can adjust Green-Magenta with the top/bottom controller buttons, or Blue-amber with the left and right controller buttons. The '''Green''' button resets the adjustment value to default. Press OK when done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====CUSTOM WHITE BALANCE====&lt;br /&gt;
It is recommended to use custom white balance on any DSLR camera. The preset white balance options may come in handy, but only by setting a custom white balance can you be sure that the colors in your images will be accurate.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# With the camera on, fill the frame with a completely white object (such as a piece of paper) in the desired lighting.&lt;br /&gt;
# Access the white balance options as described above, and navigate to '''Custom.'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Push the '''Main Switch''' to the '''Preview''' selection. This will set your custom white balance using the white reference within the frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CUSTOM IMAGE==&lt;br /&gt;
You can utilize this feature to change the desired picture style with different colors.  If you do not want the camera to change the color of your images, set this to &amp;quot;Natural&amp;quot; (no color manipulation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''right button on the Four-Way Controller''' to pull up the Custom Image setting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the desired tone.  Scroll through controller buttons to view options.  You can engage the '''PREVIEW''' button to preview the background image with selected effect.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''INFO''' to pull up the parameter setting screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the parameters.  The '''top/bottom controller buttons''' selects parameter, the '''left/right controller buttons''' adjust the value, the '''Front e-dial''' switches contrast, the '''Rear e-dial''' switches sharpness, and the '''Green''' button resets the adjustment value to default.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''OK'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==EXPOSURE MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
This camera has many exposure mode options. The recommended exposure mode for the majority of photography is '''M (Manual)'''. P, Sv, Tv, Av, and TAv are all semi-automatic exposure modes and, when engaged, the camera will make certain exposure decisions for you (refer to chart below).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Mode Dial''' to change the exposure mode setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:exposure_modes.png|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==DRIVE MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Drive Mode''' refers to the capturing mode that images are taken. This camera has many different drive modes. Use the chart below to select your desired drive mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the drive mode, press the '''top button on the Four-way Controller''' and make your selection.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:drive_modes.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==METERING MODES==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Metering''' refers to the built-in light meter in the camera. The light meter determines the amount of light coming into the lens. The Pentax 645Z has multiple metering modes. Use the chart below to select your desired metering mode.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''Metering Mode Dial''', located near the '''Mode Dial''', to switch between the three metering modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Metering.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Mediaworks-_Intro_to_Premiere_Pro&amp;diff=37394</id>
		<title>Mediaworks- Intro to Premiere Pro</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Mediaworks-_Intro_to_Premiere_Pro&amp;diff=37394"/>
				<updated>2018-10-01T16:36:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: Created page with &amp;quot;  Category:Workshops&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Workshops]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=COM_117&amp;diff=36645</id>
		<title>COM 117</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=COM_117&amp;diff=36645"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:21:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:COM117-110AV-Rack.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
Need help? Call AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exterior Wall Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
# '''DISPLAY''' button turns on Projector&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your video source, '''HDMI''' or '''VGA'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug in your computer using either an HDMI or VGA cable&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the '''VOLUME''' control knob to adjust volume.&lt;br /&gt;
# DO NOT PLUG IN BOTH A VGA AND HDMI CABLE AT THE SAME TIME, the system will not work&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: there is a short delay in video switching (5-10 sec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exterior Wall Panel - Microphone Use===&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect XLR cable from the microphone to the '''MIC''' input on the panel&lt;br /&gt;
# '''MIC UP''' &amp;amp; '''MIC DOWN''' buttons control the microphone volume&lt;br /&gt;
# Mic volume is independent of the Wall Panel '''Volume'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AV Rack===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''RACK''' button on external AV PANEL&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''DISPLAY''' button on external AV PANEL to turn on projector&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your video source: '''VGA''' (Laptop), '''HDMI''', '''BLU RAY''', '''DVD/VCR''' or '''CASSETTE'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert or plug in your media&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''RANE''' audio mixer use the individual source knobs to control the volume.  =====MAKE SURE '''OUTPUT''' VOLUME IS TURNED UP (Around 9:00)=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn down all unused volume knobs that are not in use.&lt;br /&gt;
# Return the individual source volume on RANE mixer to zero when finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Please power everything off when done &amp;amp; lock the AV Cabinet====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Longhouse_1002&amp;diff=36644</id>
		<title>Longhouse 1002</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Longhouse_1002&amp;diff=36644"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:21:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need help? Call AV classroom support ext. 6270.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cedar Room==&lt;br /&gt;
* There are speakers installed in the room.&lt;br /&gt;
* This room does not have a data projector or any other equipment installed.&lt;br /&gt;
* An adapter box can be provided to connect line level (computer, iPod, etc) signals to the speakers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sem_II_2105_Meeting_Room&amp;diff=36643</id>
		<title>Sem II 2105 Meeting Room</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sem_II_2105_Meeting_Room&amp;diff=36643"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:20:26Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:2105.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need Help? Call AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
===Laptop Using VGA cable:===&lt;br /&gt;
#	Lower screen using pull down cord.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Press the projector ‘ON’ button to turn on data projector… will take 30 seconds to fully warm up.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Select ‘VGA Laptop’ on media control panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Locate VGA cable and connect to laptop’s input… make sure to have VGA cable mini plugged into your laptop headphone jack for audio.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Use volume knob on media control panel for room volume. Your laptop also has volume.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laptop Using HDMI cable:===&lt;br /&gt;
#	Lower screen using pull down cord.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Press projector “ON” button to turn on data projector… will take 30 seconds to fully warm up.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Select HDMI laptop on media control panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Locate HDMI cable and attach to laptop’s input.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Turn on laptop now.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Use volume knob on media control panel for room volume. Your laptop also has volume control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Play DVD From Laptop:===&lt;br /&gt;
#	Connect your laptop to system using VGA or HDMI cables.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Select VGA or HDMI on media control panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Insert DVD into laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
#	DVD icon should show in upper right on laptop, click DVD icon.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Volume control is on media control panel and laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ipod:===&lt;br /&gt;
#	You’ll need a mini to mini cable to connect ipod, tablet, etc. to media control panel. Media Loan has these, LIB 2504.&lt;br /&gt;
#	On media control panel, input mini cable into ipod, tablet, etc. input.&lt;br /&gt;
#	On ipod, tablet, etc. insert mini cable into mini input.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Room volume is on media control panel and your ipod, tablet, etc. device has volume control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Microphone:===&lt;br /&gt;
#	You’ll need a mic, they are available from Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Plug mic cable (XLR) into mic input below media control panel.&lt;br /&gt;
#	Volume control is located on media control panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Troubleshooting:===&lt;br /&gt;
No picture?:&lt;br /&gt;
:- Does laptop have power?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is data projector turned on?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is VGA or HDMI cable connected to media control panel and laptop?&lt;br /&gt;
No audio?:&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is your laptop powered up?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is volume on laptop turned up?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is room volume on media control panel turned up?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is VGA mini audio cable inserted into headphone jack?&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=COM_408_Design_Lab&amp;diff=36642</id>
		<title>COM 408 Design Lab</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=COM_408_Design_Lab&amp;diff=36642"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:17:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:COM408-AV-Rack9-14.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need Help? AV classroom support ext. 6270.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
Turn on '''MAIN POWER''' - orange switch on the top, right of rack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exterior Wall Panel===&lt;br /&gt;
# '''DISPLAY''' button turns on Projector&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your video source, '''HDMI''' or '''VGA'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug in your computer using either an HDMI or VGA cable&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the '''VOLUME''' control knob to adjust volume.&lt;br /&gt;
# DO NOT PLUG IN BOTH A VGA AND HDMI CABLE AT THE SAME TIME, they system will not work&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: there is a short delay in video switching (5-10 sec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Exterior Wall Panel - Microphone Use===&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect XLR cable from the microphone to the '''MIC''' input on the panel&lt;br /&gt;
# '''MIC UP''' &amp;amp; '''MIC DOWN''' buttons control the microphone volume&lt;br /&gt;
# Mic volume is independent of the Wall Panel '''Volume'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AV Rack===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''RACK''' button on external AV PANEL&lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''DISPLAY''' button on external AV PANEL to turn on projector&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your video source: '''VGA''' (Laptop), '''HDMI''', '''BLU RAY''', '''DVD/VCR''' or '''MAC'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert or plug in your media&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''RANE''' audio mixer use the individual source knobs to control the volume.  =====MAKE SURE '''OUTPUT''' VOLUME IS TURNED UP (Around 9:00)=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn down all unused volume knobs that are not in use.&lt;br /&gt;
# Return the individual source volume on RANE mixer to zero when finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Longhouse_1007B&amp;diff=36641</id>
		<title>Longhouse 1007B</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Longhouse_1007B&amp;diff=36641"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:16:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LCC.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Need help? AV classroom support ext. 6270.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laptop: (You may play a DVD through your laptop.)===&lt;br /&gt;
#Lower the projection screen using the '''Projector Screen''' switch. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the '''ON''' button to turn on the Data Projector.  Projector will take 30 seconds to warm up.  The '''ON''' button will stop blinking when projector is ready. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the '''PC''' button. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Insert the VGA cable from laptop into computer Input Jack. Insert audio cable into the Audio Input. (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn on your laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Volume''' knob to adjust audio levels. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VCR/DVD==&lt;br /&gt;
#Using an RCA cable, connect the video and audio outputs of the VCR/DVD player to the '''Video''', '''Left Audio''' and '''Right Audio''' inputs on the panel. (Figure 1) &lt;br /&gt;
#Press the '''Video''' button  (Figure 2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Microphones==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Wired Microphones====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect an XLR cable into either input,  '''Mic 1''' or '''Mic 2'''. (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a microphone into other end of the XLR cable.&lt;br /&gt;
#Adjust the volume by using the '''trim''' knobs above the mic inputs, (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
#Additional volume can be controlled from the other panel’s '''volume''' control. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Wireless Microphone’s -&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt; This side is Red &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
* The Longhouse wireless microphones can be checked out from Media Loan (Faculty only).&lt;br /&gt;
* There are two microphones, one for each room. The microphone with yellow tape only works in 1007A.&lt;br /&gt;
* The microphone with red tape works in 1007B or can be combined to have audio in both rooms (see ‘combining’).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# To turn on the microphone hold down the red button on the bottom of the microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Mic” button on the side of the microphone is a mute switch. when illuminated red, the mic is on.&lt;br /&gt;
# The volume can be controlled using the '''volume''' knob on panel. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Combining the Rooms==&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are using 1007A and 1007B as a single room, the combine switch must be set to ‘Combined’.&lt;br /&gt;
* Contact Media Services X 6270 for media assistance.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dual Projection:====&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the VGA cable from 1007B (The side with the combine switch) into your laptop. (Dual screen will not work if you are using the VGA cable in 1007A). (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
# On the panels In both rooms select the '''PC''' inputs. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dual Room Wired Microphone:====&lt;br /&gt;
* Follow the same steps as a single room wired mic. &lt;br /&gt;
* You must connect the mic into the panel in 1007B (The side with the combine switch).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dual Room Wireless Microphone:====&lt;br /&gt;
* Follow the same steps as a single room wireless microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
* You must use the wireless mic labled B. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt; RED TAPED MICROPHONE &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Longhouse_1007A&amp;diff=36640</id>
		<title>Longhouse 1007A</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Longhouse_1007A&amp;diff=36640"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:15:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LCC.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
Need help? AV classroom support ext. 6270.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LAPTOP: (You may play a DVD through your laptop.)===&lt;br /&gt;
#Lower the projection screen using the '''Projector Screen''' switch. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the '''ON''' button to turn on the Data Projector.  Projector will take 30 seconds to warm up.  The '''ON''' button will stop blinking when projector is ready. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Press the '''PC''' button. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
#Insert the VGA cable from laptop into computer Input Jack. Insert audio cable into the Audio Input. (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn on your laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the '''Volume''' knob to adjust audio levels. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==VCR/DVD==&lt;br /&gt;
# Using an RCA cable, connect the video and audio outputs of the VCR/DVD player to the '''Video''', '''Left Audio''' and '''Right Audio''' inputs on the panel. (Figure 1) &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''Video''' button  (Figure 2).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Microphones:==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Wired Microphones====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect an XLR cable into either input,  '''Mic 1''' or '''Mic 2'''. (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a microphone into other end of the XLR cable.&lt;br /&gt;
#Adjust the volume by using the '''trim''' knobs above the mic inputs, (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
#Additional volume can be controlled from the other panel’s '''volume''' control. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Wireless Microphone’s-&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FFD700&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This side is YELLOW&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
* The Longhouse wireless microphones can be checked out from Media Loan (Faculty only).&lt;br /&gt;
* There are two microphones, one for each room. The microphone with yellow tape only works in 1007A.&lt;br /&gt;
* The microphone with red tape works in 1007B or can be combined to have audio in both rooms (see ‘combining’).&lt;br /&gt;
# To turn on the microphone hold down the red button on the bottom of the microphone.&lt;br /&gt;
# The “Mic” button on the side of the microphone is a mute switch. when illuminated red, the mic is on.&lt;br /&gt;
# The volume can be controlled using the '''volume''' knob on panel. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Combining==&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are using 1007A and 1007B as a single room, the combine switch must be set to '''Combined'''.&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a switch in the 1007B side that you can adjust to combine or separate your signal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dual Projection:====&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the VGA cable from 1007B (The side with the combine switch) into your laptop. (Dual screen will not work if you are using the VGA cable in 1007A). (Figure 1)&lt;br /&gt;
# On the panels In both rooms select the '''PC''' inputs. (Figure 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dual Room Wired Microphone:====&lt;br /&gt;
* Follow the same steps as a single room wired mic. &lt;br /&gt;
* You must connect the mic into the panel in 1007B (The side with the combine switch).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Dual Room Wireless Microphone:====&lt;br /&gt;
* Follow the same steps as a single room wireless microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
* You must use the wireless mic labled B. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF0000&amp;quot;&amp;gt; RED TAPED MICROPHONE &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sem_II_1107_Workshop&amp;diff=36639</id>
		<title>Sem II 1107 Workshop</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sem_II_1107_Workshop&amp;diff=36639"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:14:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Cabinet1105.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact  AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Projection===&lt;br /&gt;
# On the '''Switcher''' press the green '''Display Power''' button for 3 seconds to turn on the projector.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''Screen Down''' button to lower screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laptop===&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the long black '''VGA''' cord hanging from the bottom of the rack to your laptop.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the ethernet cord to plug into the blue or green data jacks located around the room for internet access.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''Laptop''' button on the '''Switcher'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the laptop last.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Audio===&lt;br /&gt;
A '''DVD Player'''is available for playing '''CDs'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the '''DVD''' player and insert your '''CD'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the '''CD/DVD''' source on the '''Switcher'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press play.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the '''Volume knob''' on the right of '''Switcher'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# You can also play '''CDs''' through your '''Laptop''' if it has a disc drive. Follow instructions for connecting your '''Laptop'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Video ( VCR &amp;amp; DVD)===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''CD/DVD''' or '''VCR''' button on the '''Switcher'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert your media into the player.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the remote controls to use the '''VCR''' or '''DVD''' for menu options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Shutdown Procedures===&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn off the '''Projector''' by pressing the '''Display Power''' button for 3 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''Screen Up''' button to raise screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn off the rack power.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Troubleshooting:===&lt;br /&gt;
No picture?:&lt;br /&gt;
:- Does laptop have power?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is data projector turned on?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is VGA cable connected to media control panel and laptop?&lt;br /&gt;
No audio?:&lt;br /&gt;
:- Is room volume on media control panel turned up?&lt;br /&gt;
:- Laptop: Is the volume on your laptop turned up and output source correctly selected?   [[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sem_II_1105_Tiered_Lecture&amp;diff=36638</id>
		<title>Sem II 1105 Tiered Lecture</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Sem_II_1105_Tiered_Lecture&amp;diff=36638"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:14:14Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Cabinet1105.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
'''Contact''' AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Podium Computer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the touch screen to start system. &lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''Computer''' then '''Podium Computer'''. This starts the projector and lowers the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
# Pull out keyboard and mouse drawer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Laptop Computer===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the touch screen to start system. &lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''Computer''' then '''Laptop'''. This will start the projector and lower the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the VGA cord to your laptop. &lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the ethernet cable to your laptop. Wireless is also available in 1105 rooms. &lt;br /&gt;
# If you do not see your laptop image then '''restart the computer''' or check your mirroring/appearance settings in your control panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DVD===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the touch screen to start system. &lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''Computer''' then '''Podium Computer'''. This starts the projector and lowers the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
# Insert your '''DVD''' into the Mac Mini computer located on the podium.&lt;br /&gt;
# Play your '''DVD''' through the system player, you can adjust volume through the keyboard or touch screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===VHS===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the touch screen to start system. &lt;br /&gt;
# Select '''Video''' and press the selection '''VHS.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Insert your VHS tape into the VCR deck inside the media cabinet near the lower entrance.&lt;br /&gt;
# Press play to begin. You can adjust the volume through the touch screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Document Camera===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Roll out document camera drawer on the right of the podium. &lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on the document camera. &lt;br /&gt;
# Press '''Document Camera''' selection on the touch screen. You should see your image on the monitor and projection screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Audio===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert your '''CD''' into the '''DVD''' player located in the media cabinet. &lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the touch screen in the podium. Press '''Audio''' and select '''CD'''. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use the touch screen menu to control your volume.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Surround Sound===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# After you have selected your media source on the touch screen then press '''surround sound'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select what type of sound mode you want. &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the '''Back''' button on the lower left of the touch screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Shutdown Procedures===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Select '''Power Off''' on the touch screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# The screen should show a loading bar of the '''projector cooling down'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Return equipment and LOCK all locks'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Technology_Help_for_Students&amp;diff=36637</id>
		<title>Technology Help for Students</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Technology_Help_for_Students&amp;diff=36637"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:13:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{stub}}&lt;br /&gt;
====Getting Help on the Web====&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://www.evergreen.edu/computing/help.htm Computing and Technology Help and Services]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Getting Help Over the Phone ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you've exhausted the web and can't find a solution, there are numbers you can call to get help over the phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[https://www.evergreen.edu/technology/academic-computing Computer Center] [TEL:360-867-6231 (360) 867-6231]''' - This number connects to the student AC Techs at the Computer Center. They are happy to answer any computer questions you may have. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''[https://www.evergreen.edu/technology/cal CAL] [TEL:360-867-6426 (360) 867-6426]''' - ditto for this number if you have any scientific computing inquiries. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''[https://www.evergreen.edu/housing/resnet Fishbowl/ResNet] [TEL:360-867-5111 (360) 867-5111]''' - If you live in housing and want to have someone take a look at your computer, call up this number and someone will walk right over to your dorm. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''[http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan Media Loan] [TEL:360-867-6253 (360) 867-6253]''' - if you checked something out from Media Loan and then need some support, you can call 'em up and talk to a student worker or other on-duty staff. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Reference Desk [TEL:360-867-6252 (360) 867-6252]''' - The Reference Desk is a good place to call if you have a question about the library or need help finding a certain book/article. However, this should be a last resort for tech questions. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''[http://blogs.evergreen.edu/photo/instructional-photography/ Digital Imaging Studio] [TEL:360-867-6562 (360) 867-6562]''' - The Digital Imaging Studio (DIS) doesn't do much help over the phone because usually the help needed is too complicated, but feel free to call if you have a question about image editing (Photoshop, InDesign, Illustrator) or scanning. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Getting Help in Person====&lt;br /&gt;
If you are absolutely new to the campus, either as a freshman or a transfer student, you will find that '''everyone''' is more than willing to help you...all you need to do is ask.  Where?  You can start at the reference desk in the Library.  There are several computers located near the reference desk and when using them you will have ready access to a reference person.  (personal experience, here!)  On the third floor of the library next to government documents and the main stacks you will find a row of offices with staff that can assist you as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A great place to get help with your academic technology questions is the [https://www.evergreen.edu/technology/academic-computing Academic Computing Center].  There is a main desk as you enter the Computer Center, and the student consultants behind the counter are more than happy to help you with any computer/printer/scanner questions. They are also a great resource for any and all general questions regarding Evergreen, and are always pleased to help connect you with other campus resources!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: This article was originally authored by the students in Information Landscapes and has been edited by Academic Technologies staff since creation.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Training and Help]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Media_Classrooms_Overview&amp;diff=36636</id>
		<title>Media Classrooms Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Media_Classrooms_Overview&amp;diff=36636"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:12:38Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Evergreen has a number of technology-enabled &amp;quot;Media Classrooms&amp;quot; equipped with built-in audio/video display systems.  All of them,  at a minimum, will allow you to display your portable computer video on a classroom projection screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some provide additional AV capabilities as detailed below:&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Level 1''' – video display and connector for portable computer video&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Level 2''' – as above plus media playback equipment in an equipment rack&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Level 3''' – as above plus a Lectern with a Mac and (in most cases) a document camera&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Listed below are the media classrooms which are available for your use and, parenthetically, information on who to contact to schedule them and who to call if you need technical assistance using them. For more detailed information on specific Media classrooms, please visit the [http://www.evergreen.edu/electronicmedia/mediaclassrooms Media Classrooms Home].&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== Media Classrooms at Olympia Campus ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Library &amp;amp; Lecture Hall Media Classrooms===&lt;br /&gt;
:Scheduling at Space Scheduling ext. 6314.&lt;br /&gt;
:Technical help: AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 1412]]: Level 3 (5.1 surround sound capable during DVD playback)&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 1540]]: Level 3 (5.1 surround sound capable during DVD playback, isolated control room for 16mm projection)&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 1326]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
*Library 2310: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 2708]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 3301]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lecture Halls: Level 3, also include slide projector and sound-isolated control room for 16mm projection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comm Building AV Classrooms - Level 2 and 3===&lt;br /&gt;
:Scheduling support from the Communications Building Manager Shannon Stewart, extension 5896)	&lt;br /&gt;
:Technical help: AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 107 Recital Hall]]: 200 seat Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 308]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 326 Screening Room]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 408 Design Lab]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
===Lab 1&amp;amp;2 AV Classrooms - Level 1===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Seminar 2 Media Classrooms===&lt;br /&gt;
:Scheduling: Space Scheduling, ext 6314. &lt;br /&gt;
:Technical help: AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A-D [[Sem II 2105 Meeting Room|2105]], [[Sem II 4107 Class Lab|4107]]: Level 1&lt;br /&gt;
*A-D [[Sem II 1107 Workshop|1107]], [[ Sem II 2107 Seminar|2107]], [[Sem II 2109 Seminar|2109]], [[Sem II 3107 Seminar|3107]], [[Sem II 3109 Seminar|3109]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*A-E [[Sem II 1105 Tiered Lecture|1105]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions guides and diagrams are provided for the following technology-enabled Media Classrooms:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;categorytree mode=&amp;quot;pages&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Media Classrooms&amp;lt;/categorytree&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Contact_Us&amp;diff=36635</id>
		<title>Contact Us</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Contact_Us&amp;diff=36635"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T22:11:27Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Phone3-green.svg|50px|left]]Additional ways to get help ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Students===&lt;br /&gt;
====General Technology Help====&lt;br /&gt;
*'''In-person help''': go to the [http://www.evergreen.edu/technology/academic-computing-center Academic Computing Center] on the main floor of the Library building&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Call''' the student help desk at [tel:360-867-6231 (360) 867-6231]&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[https://help.evergreen.edu/ Submit a help ticket]''' to have your issue directed to the proper department&lt;br /&gt;
====Scientific Computing====&lt;br /&gt;
*'''In-person help''': contact the [http://www.evergreen.edu/directory/offices/scientific-computing-cal Computer Applications Lab (CAL)] in person on the first floor of Lab II&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Call''' us at [tel:360-867-6426 (360) 867-6426]&lt;br /&gt;
====Electronic Media Work====&lt;br /&gt;
'''In-person help''' is available at the [http://www.evergreen.edu/electronicmedia/multimedialab MultiMedia Lab] located on the first floor of the Library building.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Faculty &amp;amp; Staff===&lt;br /&gt;
====General Technology Help====&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Call''' the [[Faculty and Staff Technology Support|Technology Support Center]] at [tel:360-867-6627 (360) 867-6627]&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[https://help.evergreen.edu Submit a help ticket]''' to have your issue directed to the proper department&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Media Classroom Support====&lt;br /&gt;
*'''[https://forms.evergreen.edu/classroom-support Submit a Help Request]''' to Media Services&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Call''' [http://www.evergreen.edu/technology/academic-computing-center Academic Computing Center] at [tel:360-867-6270 (360) 867-6270]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{GetHelp}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#css:&lt;br /&gt;
  #breadcrumbs2 {&lt;br /&gt;
    display: none;&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Computer_Center]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Media_Classrooms_Overview&amp;diff=36634</id>
		<title>Media Classrooms Overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Media_Classrooms_Overview&amp;diff=36634"/>
				<updated>2018-04-03T20:50:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Evergreen has a number of technology-enabled &amp;quot;Media Classrooms&amp;quot; equipped with built-in audio/video display systems.  All of them,  at a minimum, will allow you to display your portable computer video on a classroom projection screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some provide additional AV capabilities as detailed below:&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Level 1''' – video display and connector for portable computer video&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Level 2''' – as above plus media playback equipment in an equipment rack&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Level 3''' – as above plus a Lectern with a Mac and (in most cases) a document camera&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Listed below are the media classrooms which are available for your use and, parenthetically, information on who to contact to schedule them and who to call if you need technical assistance using them. For more detailed information on specific Media classrooms, please visit the [http://www.evergreen.edu/electronicmedia/mediaclassrooms Media Classrooms Home].&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== Media Classrooms at Olympia Campus ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Library &amp;amp; Lecture Hall Media Classrooms===&lt;br /&gt;
:Scheduling at Space Scheduling ext. 6314.&lt;br /&gt;
:Technical help: AV classroom support ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 1412]]: Level 3 (5.1 surround sound capable during DVD playback)&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 1540]]: Level 3 (5.1 surround sound capable during DVD playback, isolated control room for 16mm projection)&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 1326]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
*Library 2310: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 2708]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Library 3301]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lecture Halls: Level 3, also include slide projector and sound-isolated control room for 16mm projection&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comm Building AV Classrooms - Level 2 and 3===&lt;br /&gt;
:Scheduling support from the Communications Building Manager Shannon Stewart, extension 5896)	&lt;br /&gt;
:Technical help: Zena Vergara @ ext. 5277 or Media Services  @ ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 107 Recital Hall]]: 200 seat Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 308]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 326 Screening Room]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[COM 408 Design Lab]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
===Lab 1&amp;amp;2 AV Classrooms - Level 1===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Seminar 2 Media Classrooms===&lt;br /&gt;
:Scheduling: Space Scheduling, ext 6314. &lt;br /&gt;
:Technical help: Kathryn Ford @ ext. 5517 or Media Services  @ ext. 6270&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A-D [[Sem II 2105 Meeting Room|2105]], [[Sem II 4107 Class Lab|4107]]: Level 1&lt;br /&gt;
*A-D [[Sem II 1107 Workshop|1107]], [[ Sem II 2107 Seminar|2107]], [[Sem II 2109 Seminar|2109]], [[Sem II 3107 Seminar|3107]], [[Sem II 3109 Seminar|3109]]: Level 2&lt;br /&gt;
*A-E [[Sem II 1105 Tiered Lecture|1105]]: Level 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions guides and diagrams are provided for the following technology-enabled Media Classrooms:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;categorytree mode=&amp;quot;pages&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Media Classrooms&amp;lt;/categorytree&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Classrooms]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Lighting_Equipment_Guide&amp;diff=36310</id>
		<title>APS Lighting Equipment Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Lighting_Equipment_Guide&amp;diff=36310"/>
				<updated>2018-01-04T22:27:29Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:vimeo|187691086|600|center|Basic Lighting Concepts}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SAFETY==&lt;br /&gt;
Please exercise caution with all lighting equipment checked out from Media Loan.  The lights can get extremely hot and most require a lot of power. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====When using lighting equipment from Media Loan, ALWAYS:====&lt;br /&gt;
* Use gloves to protect your hands&lt;br /&gt;
* Tape down wires/cords to prevent tripping hazards&lt;br /&gt;
* Weigh down heavy stands with sandbags&lt;br /&gt;
* Plug lights into grounded outlets&lt;br /&gt;
* Use gloves/hand protection when changing lamps (bulbs)&lt;br /&gt;
* Wait for hot lights to cool down before packing them away (at least ten minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====DO NOT:====&lt;br /&gt;
Touch hot lights without proper hand protection&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Touch lamps (bulbs) with your bare hands (excluding fluorescent and LED)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Expose lights to water&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Expose lights to extreme weather/temperatures&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set a hot light on top of a gel&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Lamp (bulb) Changing====&lt;br /&gt;
It is extremely important that you never touch halogen lamps with your bare hands.  Your hands are covered in oils that, if they get on a lamp, will heat up and potentially cause explosions. To prevent this, you must cover your hands with proper gloves (available in APS) or a clean cloth.  Leather, or any type of &amp;quot;working&amp;quot; gloves, will suffice. Do not use latex.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The only type of bulbs you can safely touch with your bare hands are fluorescent and LED. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Every kit should come with spare replacement lamps in the case.  If you need help changing a lamp, please call APS (x5506) or stop by during open APS hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Know Your Circuits====&lt;br /&gt;
These lights require a lot of power.  Each house is divided into multiple circuits, as controlled by a circuit board, and each circuit has a capacity.  Overloading a circuit will cause a blow-out and potential damage. Use the formula below to calculate the wattage a circuit is capable of supporting, without accidents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''AMPS x VOLTS = WATTS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common household plugs are typically 15-20 amps circuits.  Household voltage capacity is 110-120V, so for the purpose of this equation it's a good idea to round down to an even 100V to prevent any blow-outs. In an average house, each circuit is capable of supporting approximately 1500 Watts (15 x 100 = 1500).  This is a conservative estimate and will be different per location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LIGHTING EQUIPMENT IN APS==&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple options for lighting equipment in APS.  These kits do not require proficiencies, but as with all other APS checkouts, they do require an APS workorder.  APS equipment is typically restricted to students in media-centric classes/programs and ILC's/SOS's. Before requesting equipment from APS, please familiarize yourself with APS policies and procedures [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ARRILITE 3-LIGHT KITS===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:arri1.jpg|thumb|200px|right|Arri 1000W/650W]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:arri_open.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Arri 1000W/650W Open-Face]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3 per kit&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 650W or 1000W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors, Stands, Scrims&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Arri 3-Light Kits come with three open-face focusing flood lights of the same wattage (1000W '''or''' 650W). They are designed for a wide range of film and photographic lighting applications. Each kit comes with three barndoors, 3 stands, and scrims.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 1000W 3-Light kit provides beam angles of 65° in the flood position and 24° in the spot position. Each fixture will throw a beam of 695 footcandles 4.3 ft (1.4 m) in diameter, @ full spot, from a distance of 10 ft (3 m). It will provide a beam of 145 footcandles 13 ft (4m) in diameter @ full flood, from the same distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Arrlite 650 has a 7.25&amp;quot; open face and provides beam angles of 70° in the flood position, and 26° in the spot position. Each fixture will throw a beam of 450 footcandles 4.3 ft in diameter @ full spot, from a distance of 10 ft. It will provide a beam of 100 footcandles, 14 ft diameter @ full flood, from the same distance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ARRI SOFTKEY KIT===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:arri_soft.jpg|200px|left|thumb|Arri Softkey]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 2x650W (Fresnel), 1000W (Softbox)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors, Stands, Scrims, Fresnel Lenses&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This kit includes two 650W Fresnel lights and one 1000W Softbox. The 650W Fresnel lights have a focusable spotlight which can be adjusted via a knob on the back of the light (&amp;quot;spot&amp;quot; for a narrowly focused beam, or &amp;quot;flood&amp;quot; for a wide beam). The beam angle in the flood position is 52 degrees, and a narrow 14.5 degrees in the spot position. The 650W in this kit has a 4.3&amp;quot; low expansion, borosillicate fresnel lens which casts a soft, even illumination across the beam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The small size and light weight of the 1000W Softbox make it an excellent solution for a soft fill or key.  The Softbox has a narrow profile of only 5.5&amp;quot; deep, in which the light bounces off a reflector in the back of the instrument for indirect, even, soft light.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LOWEL CASELITES===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:caselite.jpg|200px|right|thumb|Lowel Caselite]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 55W/bulb, 110W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors, Stand, Cord, Eggcrate, Stand Arm, Stand Mount&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lowel Caselites are designed to offer beautiful, soft, easy to use fluorescents in a compact, location-friendly system. The current popularity of fluorescent lights in film &amp;amp; video production is well deserved. They offer soft and efficient light at several times the output of incandescent halogen sources.  These lights are ideal for interviews.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Caselites are compact, lightweight, rugged and completely self-contained without sacrificing output or light quality. The all-in-one Caselite is both light and case combined, and each one comes with a stand, eggcraft, cord, arm, and stand mount bracket. APS carries both 5300K (daylight) and 3000K (tungsten) compact fluorescent lamps.  Additional lamps can be checked out separately.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TEENIE-WEENIE MOLES / TEENIE MOLES / MICKEY MOLES===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 4 per kit&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity:&lt;br /&gt;
*Teenie-Weenie Mole: 600W&lt;br /&gt;
*Teenie Mole: 650W&lt;br /&gt;
*Mickey Mole: 1000W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: None (accessory kits available separately)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these kits contains four open-face, tungsten balanced, quartz instruments that have spot-flood adjustments. Also available with the Mickey Moles/Teenie Moles/Teenie Weenie Moles are stands and accessory kits which include barn doors, scrims, dichroic conversion filters (which will balance tungsten light color to approximate daylight), and filter holders. These kits should meet most of your heavy duty lighting needs. A separate stand kit is also needed to fully utilize these lights as none of them come with stands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:MickeyAccessories.jpg|Mole Accessories&lt;br /&gt;
File:teenie_mole.jpg|Mickey / Teenie Mole&lt;br /&gt;
File:teenie_weenie.jpg|Teenie Weenie Mole&lt;br /&gt;
File:TeenieWeenie.jpg|Moles&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:mini_mole.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Mini Mole]]&lt;br /&gt;
===MINI MOLES===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 4&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 200W &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Fresnel lenses, Desk Stands &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This kit contains four 200 watt tungsten balance instruments. The lights are small, have a fresnel lens, and come with snoots and aperture plates for better control of light. The inclusion of small desk stands make this kit perfect for 3D animation projects. The instruments can also be mounted on C-Stands for use in animation or as a small kick light hidden in a set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MOLEFAYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:1lightMolefay.jpg|One-Light Molefay&lt;br /&gt;
File:2lightMolefay.jpg|Two-Light Molefay&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: variable&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 650W/1300W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a good lighting instrument for outdoor use as a fill light when using the sun as a key light source because it is '''daylight balanced'''. Each kit is slightly different, one has 2-2 light Molefays, another has 1-2 light Molefays and accessories, and the third has 2-1 light Molefays and accessories. Each dichroic filtered lamp is rated at 605 watts and approximates 5,600 K daylight. Each kit requires separate light stands.&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:8tubeMolescent.jpg|150px|thumb|right|8-Tube Molescent]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===8-TUBE MOLESCENT===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 15W/bulb, 120W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Stand, Gel Holders&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a very large light and holds 8 total fluorescent bulbs.  The color temperature that we equip with the 8-Tube Molescent is CW (cool white).  Each bulb is 15W each, which equals a total output of 120W for this instrument. Four bulbs can be operated at a time, which allows for more control of the output (60W-120W).  The light this provides is diffuse and rather soft, and is a good instrument to match office or classroom lighting. Large frames for gels are provided with this light, as well as a wheeled junior-spud stand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===COLORTRAN 3-LIGHT KIT===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 2x500W (Mini-Lites), 750W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: 2 Stands, 2 Barndoors (Mini-Lites), 3 Gaffer Grip Clamps&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This kit comes with three lights: two Colortran Mini-Lites (500W), and one open-face instrument (750W). There are also three gaffer grip clamps and two stands. The clamps allow you to mount the lights to various surfaces and structures, which makes this kit very versatile. The Mini-Lites are very compact and are ideal for small sets.  Each light in this kit is capable of supporting up to 1000W lamps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:clamp.jpg|Gaffer Grip Clamp (3)&lt;br /&gt;
File:Colortranflood.JPG|Colortran 750W (1)&lt;br /&gt;
File:Minilite.jpg|Colortran Mini-Lite 500W (2)&lt;br /&gt;
File:Minilite2.jpg|Colortran Mini-Lite 500W (2)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2K BABY &amp;quot;ZIP&amp;quot; SOFTLITE===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:babysoftlite.jpg|200px|thumb|left|2K Baby Softlite]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 1000W/bulb, 2000W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Designed to fill the need for a small compact Softlight with high performance for locations and small sets where space is at a minimum.  All the light comes indirect and unobstructed from diffuse surfaces.  This instrument has two 1000W lamps and two switches to control them separately, allowing for 1000W or 2000W output.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Doublebroad.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Molequartz Double Broad]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MOLEQUARTS DOUBLE BROAD===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 1000W/bulb, 2000W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instrument comes with two switchable 1000W lamps.  It provides soft, even fill light in a rectangular field with edge-to-edge and top-to-bottom uniformity.  The Double Broad can be used as a key or fill light source.  Separate stand required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRACAST LED===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LED intensity.png|Dracast LED Light Intensity Chart&lt;br /&gt;
File:Dracast_LED.jpg|Dracast LED&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of Lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light Intensity: (see chart)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories available: barndoor, light cover, stand, diffusion kit.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dracast LED is an ideal choice for location work, interviews and small sets where color accuracy, control and flicker-free output are of major importance. Variable color temperature from 3,200K-5,600K means that you can quickly match the prevailing ambient or artificial light balance with a simple twist of a knob. Dimming is equally convenient via another knob that adjusts the light intensity from 100-0% with negligible color shift. This light has a low electricity draw of 60W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LIGHTING ACCESSORIES (APS)===&lt;br /&gt;
Lighting accessories in APS include:&lt;br /&gt;
* Light Stands (single &amp;amp; baby stand kits)&lt;br /&gt;
* Gels: Color and diffusion kits&lt;br /&gt;
* Bounce Discs&lt;br /&gt;
* Clothes Pins (C-47's): Used to attach gels to lights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Bounce Discs====&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Bounce.jpg|200px|thumb|right|5-in-one 42 &amp;quot; Bounce Disk]]&lt;br /&gt;
The 42&amp;quot; 5-in-1 Collapsible Reflector Disc from Raya is a versatile light modification tool than can find uses in the studio and on location. This disc provides white, silver, gold, and black surfaces as well as a one stop translucent diffusion panel. The tool allows you to quickly and easily make adjustments to your lighting in order to get the look you want. Also, the disc is able to fold down to 1/3 its size and be stored inside the included carrying bag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* White provides a neutral soft reflection useful for fill light&lt;br /&gt;
* Silver offers a neutral color balance similar to the white but with a higher contrast, increasing specular highlights&lt;br /&gt;
* Gold reflects a warmer light onto a subject, useful to enhancing skin tones or balancing a cool scene&lt;br /&gt;
* Black will block unwanted reflections and eliminate spill&lt;br /&gt;
* The translucent diffuser lessens light power by 1 stop and will help create a broader, softer light source that will wrap around your subject&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===GRIP===&lt;br /&gt;
====C-Stands and Gobo arms====&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Cstand.jpg|200px|thumb|right|C-Stand with Gobo Arm]]&lt;br /&gt;
A C-stand is primarily used to position light modifiers, such as silks, nets, or flags, in front of light sources. The stand is constructed of metal and consists of a collapsible base, two riser columns, and a baby pin on top. In addition, a C-stand includes a gobo head and a gobo arm, which provide the ability to articulate a light modifier without moving the stand itself. The legs of C stands are designed to be nested, so many stands can be placed around a light source. They can also be used to mount small light instruments, such as the Colortran Mini-Lite at APS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Flags====&lt;br /&gt;
Flags are used for controlling an lighting instrument. Flags are mounted onto C-Stands and placed in front of lights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single flags available for checkout at APS include:&lt;br /&gt;
* Cutter (Black flag): This completely blocks lighting. Used for intentionally shaping light.&lt;br /&gt;
* Single Scrim (Green): Reduces the amount of light produced from an instrument by half of a stop.&lt;br /&gt;
* Double Scrim (Red): Reduces the amount of by one full stop.&lt;br /&gt;
* Silk (Yellow): Diffuses and greatly reduces the amount of light.&lt;br /&gt;
* Wooden Cucoloris (Cookie): Creates patterns by cutting shapes into it. Used to create background foliage, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cello Cucoloris (Cookie): Diffuses light and creates shapes. More subtle effects than the wooden cookie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Flag Kits (Lighting Control Kits)====&lt;br /&gt;
There are also flag kits available at APS.  These come with a cutter, single scrim, double scrim, and silk in a transportable bag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Grip Gear====&lt;br /&gt;
* Apple Boxes: Used for propping various objects and subjects&lt;br /&gt;
* Gloves: Wear when handling hot lighting equipment, or changing bulbs&lt;br /&gt;
* Clamps: Used for various reasons, such as to attach gear to C-Stands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LIGHTING EQUIPMENT IN GENERAL ACCESS (GA)==&lt;br /&gt;
The following equipment is available through General Access at Media Loan. They do not require an APS workorder or proficiency. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:lql.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Lowel Omni (LQL)]]&lt;br /&gt;
===LOWEL OMNI KIT (LQL)===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 500W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: barndoors (3), stands (3), power cords (3), scrims (3), gel holders (3)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optional accessories: Umbrella kit (needs to be requested separately)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Lowel Omni kit (LQL) comes with three tungsten-balanced 500W lights.  The lights are useful as a key or back light. You can add an umbrella or diffusion to use them as a soft fill. Each light has a spot-flood adjustment. These lights get VERY hot - use caution when operating them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LOWEL PRO KIT (LQS)===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:lqs.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Lowel Pro (LQS)]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 250W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: barndoors (3), stands (3), power cords (3), scrims (3), gel holders (3)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optional accessories: Umbrella kit (needs to be requested separately)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lowel Pro kit (LQS) comes with three tungsten-balanced 250W lights. They are identical to the LQL kit, but are half the wattage. The LQS gives even light and can be used as a low-level key, accent, fill (with diffusion), or back light. Each light has a spot-flood adjustment. These lights get VERY hot - use caution when operating them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===GENARAY LED KIT===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:led.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Genaray LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of  lights: 2&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 1,700 lumens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: diffusion (2), power cords (2), stands (2)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optional accessories: battery pack (needs to be requested separately)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SpectroLED Essential 240 Bi-Color LED Light from Genaray is a compact light source with local dimming from 0-100%, a 60 degree flood beam angle and variable color balance from 3,200K tungsten to 5,600K daylight. This LED kit produces soft light, which can be made softer by attaching the included diffusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:led2.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Hot shoe LED (BESCOR FP-180)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HOT SHOE LED (BESCOR FP-180)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 200 lumens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: tungsten diffusion&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bescor FP-180 is a camera-mountable light that is small and compact. It has 180 LED bulbs, 90 of which are tungsten and 90 daylight. The light has separate dimmer controls for the tungsten and daylight bulbs. This light can be used in tight spaces for extra illumination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LIGHTING ACCESSORIES (GA)===&lt;br /&gt;
* Bounce Disk (32&amp;quot; Impact Collapsible Circular Reflector Disc - Silver/White)&lt;br /&gt;
* Umbrella Kit (3, Silver/White)&lt;br /&gt;
* Gels (color packs)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36118</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36118"/>
				<updated>2017-11-17T22:34:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual Camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. &amp;lt;br /&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== General Camera Care ===&lt;br /&gt;
Do not drop this camera!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not subject the camera to moisture or water!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not store this camera in excessive cold!	&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use excessive physical force! &lt;br /&gt;
Return to Media Loan for cleaning!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not take the top off of the Pentax 6X7/67II, it will get dust inside! &lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan currently carries six brands of Medium Format cameras.  This guide will give you the general knowledge you’ll need to operate all of our Medium Format cameras.  However, if there are any differences in operation between models, we have listed those differences within each section. &lt;br /&gt;
As with all other Media Loan Equipment, the users assume full financial responsibilities when borrowing the cameras from Media Loan.When checking out a Medium Format camera, it is recommended that you also check out:&lt;br /&gt;
•Light Meter&lt;br /&gt;
•Sync Cable&lt;br /&gt;
•Flash&lt;br /&gt;
•Tripod&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a limited number of Medium Format Cameras.  We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Film ===&lt;br /&gt;
Medium Format cameras usually use 120 film, which allows 12 exposures in 2 1/4 cameras and 10 exposures in the Pentax 6X7/67II. The Pentax 6X7/67II will also accept 220 film which will produce 20 images. 220 film is not recommended as the film is quite susceptible to damage.&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2 1/4 Cameras ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
Place camera neck strap over your head. Hold camera body, bottom-side up with the back facing toward you, with a firm grip on both sides of camera. If  you are using the Seagull or Kalimar, push safety lever in and turn locking disk till arrow points to “O”. If you are using the Mamiya, turn the dial with the red dot on the back of the camera so that it points up, then slide it in the direction of the arrow.  Open the back cover. Move the empty spool to the top spool chamber. Put unexposed film in the lower chamber, pulling film towards empty spool.  Make sure film paper is white side up. Fit tapered end into slot on empty spool.  This will help hold the film. Rotate the film-winding knob until the arrow on the film leader is aligned with the dot on the frame. (The dots on the Seagull and Kalimar are hard to see, they are located nearest to the far corners of opening.) &lt;br /&gt;
Close the camera back and turn locking disk till arrow points to “C”. (The Seagull and Kalimar knob will click when the back is fully shut.) Wind film until crank stops and “1” appears in the film exposure counter.&lt;br /&gt;
Rotate the film advance crank in the opposite direction (counter-clockwise) one half turn until it stops (this step is unnecessary with the Mamiya).  This will cock the shutter so that the camera is ready for taking the picture.                           &lt;br /&gt;
Be aware that, while Photo Services at Evergreen will process 220 film, many places may not.&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the camera is stored uncocked.  Always load the film in shade or subdued light!&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there’s no more tension on the advance crank.  At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up to the take-up spool.  When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure.  Lick or peel the tab and wrap it firmly around the exposed film.  Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Viewing &amp;amp; Focusing ====&lt;br /&gt;
Lift the back of the lid to open the viewfinder.  The magnifier will spring up by pushing the viewfinder cover in or by pushing the lever in the viewfinder to the side.  Use the focusing knob on the left (right on the Yashica or, if it is the Mamiya, on both sides near the bottom front) of the camera body to focus.  Look through the magnifier and rotate the focusing knob until the two split-images come into one or the main subject image on the focusing screen becomes sharp.&lt;br /&gt;
Take special consideration when focusing the Mamiya: unlike the other 2 1/4 cameras, the C33 has a bellows which is fragile and prone to cracking.&lt;br /&gt;
The sports finder is the little square window on the back of the viewfinder.  It’s used to help you align the lens with a fast-moving subject.  Unfortunately, you will not be able to focus the camera while you use this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
To close the viewfinder press the sides and fold the lid down.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taking the Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
Hold the camera at waist level.  After cocking the shutter, don’t change the shutter speed!  Press the shutter release button to take a picture.  Wind the crank for the next exposure.  Make sure the frame number in the window lines up. (With the Yashica, you must manually cock the shutter each time you wish to make an exposure.)&lt;br /&gt;
==== Shutter Speed ====&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter speed controls the duration of the exposure. The following table will help you determine the proper shutter speed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Camera may be &lt;br /&gt;
Hand Held	Use a Tripod or Brace&lt;br /&gt;
Average Pictures	Action Pictures	Time &lt;br /&gt;
Exposure	Slow Speeds&lt;br /&gt;
1/60  1/125	1/250 1/500	‘B’	1 sec  1/2  1/4  1/8  1/15 1/30&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Aperture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Lens Aperture controls the amount of light that will pass through the lens onto the light sensitive film.  The following examples will help you determine the appropriate setting.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize the flash with the Yashica switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Yashica, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting the ASA ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ASA rating indicates the film’s sensitivity to light.  The higher the ASA number, the less light required for proper exposure.  &lt;br /&gt;
Most of Media Loan’s Medium Format cameras do not have a built-in light meter. The Yashica  has a reminder dial to help you remember the ASA rating, but this dial serves no other purpose.  Therefore, when checking out a camera, it is recommended that you also check out a light meter. Handout for the light meter is also available from Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7/67II ===&lt;br /&gt;
The light meter and other features do not work on the Pentax 6X7/67II unless there is film in the camera.* &lt;br /&gt;
This camera is not useful for shooting with flash in the daylight, as its fastest sync speed is 1/30 of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Make sure that the pressure plate and the film-winding knob are set to the correct film length.&lt;br /&gt;
Placing the neck strap over your head and hold the camera body with the bottom and back facing toward you, have a firm grip on the camera. Now pull out the small metal tab on the bottom left-hand side of the camera to release and open the back cover. Turn both metal levers on the bottom of the camera to the left to unlock them (toward the white dot). Make sure the empty spool is on the right side. Put the unexposed film into the left chamber then lock the metal levers on the bottom of the camera. Pull the film toward the empty spool and fit tapered end into the slot; this will help hold the film. Rotate the film advance lever until the arrow on the film leader is aligned with the inside dot according to the size of film you are using. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading the Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After the frames are exposed continue to turn the winding crank a few extra times until there’s no more tension on the advance crank. At this point the protective paper of the film should be rolled up to the take-up spool. When unloading the film keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
Plug the flash with a flash cord into the X sync terminal. This will sync with 1/30th of a second and slower. Do not use Media Loan flashes in the FP sync terminal. This requires a special flash bulb. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Checking the Battery ====&lt;br /&gt;
To check the battery, press the white “Batt. Check” button on the back upper left of the camera. Above the button a red light will light up if the battery is good. If the battery is dead then bring it to Media Loan to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Focus ====&lt;br /&gt;
While looking through the viewfinder turn the focus ring until your subject comes into focus. An alternative way of setting the focus is to measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and turn to that number of feet or meters on the focus ring.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Light Meter ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Pentax 6x7’s have a built in light meter. To turn on the light meter remove the lens cap. Set the exposure by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) of the lens until the needle is in the center position of the meter. It is always a good idea to have a separate light meter from the one in the camera as well.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting the ISO (Also called ASA) and shutter speed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Lift the outer ring on the shutter speed dial (left of the camera), and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is on the orange arrow. Set the shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally you should use a tripod if the shutter speed is slower than 1/30th of a second, but it is recommended to use a tripod for 1/60th of a second and below due to mirror slap and shutter vibration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36117</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36117"/>
				<updated>2017-11-17T22:33:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''A proficiency test is required to check out this camera.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual Camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes. &amp;lt;br /&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|900x900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== General Camera Care ===&lt;br /&gt;
Do not drop this camera!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not subject the camera to moisture or water!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not store this camera in excessive cold!	&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use excessive physical force! &lt;br /&gt;
Return to Media Loan for cleaning!&lt;br /&gt;
Do not take the top off of the Pentax 6X7/67II, it will get dust inside! &lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan currently carries six brands of Medium Format cameras.  This guide will give you the general knowledge you’ll need to operate all of our Medium Format cameras.  However, if there are any differences in operation between models, we have listed those differences within each section. &lt;br /&gt;
As with all other Media Loan Equipment, the users assume full financial responsibilities when borrowing the cameras from Media Loan.When checking out a Medium Format camera, it is recommended that you also check out:&lt;br /&gt;
•Light Meter&lt;br /&gt;
•Sync Cable&lt;br /&gt;
•Flash&lt;br /&gt;
•Tripod&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a limited number of Medium Format Cameras.  We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Film ===&lt;br /&gt;
Medium Format cameras usually use 120 film, which allows 12 exposures in 2 1/4 cameras and 10 exposures in the Pentax 6X7/67II. The Pentax 6X7/67II will also accept 220 film which will produce 20 images. 220 film is not recommended as the film is quite susceptible to damage.&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2 1/4 Cameras ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
Place camera neck strap over your head. Hold camera body, bottom-side up with the back facing toward you, with a firm grip on both sides of camera. If  you are using the Seagull or Kalimar, push safety lever in and turn locking disk till arrow points to “O”. If you are using the Mamiya, turn the dial with the red dot on the back of the camera so that it points up, then slide it in the direction of the arrow.  Open the back cover. Move the empty spool to the top spool chamber. Put unexposed film in the lower chamber, pulling film towards empty spool.  Make sure film paper is white side up. Fit tapered end into slot on empty spool.  This will help hold the film. Rotate the film-winding knob until the arrow on the film leader is aligned with the dot on the frame. (The dots on the Seagull and Kalimar are hard to see, they are located nearest to the far corners of opening.) &lt;br /&gt;
Close the camera back and turn locking disk till arrow points to “C”. (The Seagull and Kalimar knob will click when the back is fully shut.) Wind film until crank stops and “1” appears in the film exposure counter.&lt;br /&gt;
Rotate the film advance crank in the opposite direction (counter-clockwise) one half turn until it stops (this step is unnecessary with the Mamiya).  This will cock the shutter so that the camera is ready for taking the picture.                           &lt;br /&gt;
Be aware that, while Photo Services at Evergreen will process 220 film, many places may not.&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the camera is stored uncocked.  Always load the film in shade or subdued light!&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there’s no more tension on the advance crank.  At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up to the take-up spool.  When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure.  Lick or peel the tab and wrap it firmly around the exposed film.  Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Viewing &amp;amp; Focusing ====&lt;br /&gt;
Lift the back of the lid to open the viewfinder.  The magnifier will spring up by pushing the viewfinder cover in or by pushing the lever in the viewfinder to the side.  Use the focusing knob on the left (right on the Yashica or, if it is the Mamiya, on both sides near the bottom front) of the camera body to focus.  Look through the magnifier and rotate the focusing knob until the two split-images come into one or the main subject image on the focusing screen becomes sharp.&lt;br /&gt;
Take special consideration when focusing the Mamiya: unlike the other 2 1/4 cameras, the C33 has a bellows which is fragile and prone to cracking.&lt;br /&gt;
The sports finder is the little square window on the back of the viewfinder.  It’s used to help you align the lens with a fast-moving subject.  Unfortunately, you will not be able to focus the camera while you use this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
To close the viewfinder press the sides and fold the lid down.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taking the Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
Hold the camera at waist level.  After cocking the shutter, don’t change the shutter speed!  Press the shutter release button to take a picture.  Wind the crank for the next exposure.  Make sure the frame number in the window lines up. (With the Yashica, you must manually cock the shutter each time you wish to make an exposure.)&lt;br /&gt;
==== Shutter Speed ====&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter speed controls the duration of the exposure. The following table will help you determine the proper shutter speed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Camera may be!! &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Hand Held || Use a Tripod or Brace ||&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Average Pictures || Action pictures || Time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Example || Example || Example&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Camera may be &lt;br /&gt;
Hand Held	Use a Tripod or Brace&lt;br /&gt;
Average Pictures	Action Pictures	Time &lt;br /&gt;
Exposure	Slow Speeds&lt;br /&gt;
1/60  1/125	1/250 1/500	‘B’	1 sec  1/2  1/4  1/8  1/15 1/30&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Aperture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Lens Aperture controls the amount of light that will pass through the lens onto the light sensitive film.  The following examples will help you determine the appropriate setting.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize the flash with the Yashica switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Yashica, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting the ASA ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ASA rating indicates the film’s sensitivity to light.  The higher the ASA number, the less light required for proper exposure.  &lt;br /&gt;
Most of Media Loan’s Medium Format cameras do not have a built-in light meter. The Yashica  has a reminder dial to help you remember the ASA rating, but this dial serves no other purpose.  Therefore, when checking out a camera, it is recommended that you also check out a light meter. Handout for the light meter is also available from Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7/67II ===&lt;br /&gt;
The light meter and other features do not work on the Pentax 6X7/67II unless there is film in the camera.* &lt;br /&gt;
This camera is not useful for shooting with flash in the daylight, as its fastest sync speed is 1/30 of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Make sure that the pressure plate and the film-winding knob are set to the correct film length.&lt;br /&gt;
Placing the neck strap over your head and hold the camera body with the bottom and back facing toward you, have a firm grip on the camera. Now pull out the small metal tab on the bottom left-hand side of the camera to release and open the back cover. Turn both metal levers on the bottom of the camera to the left to unlock them (toward the white dot). Make sure the empty spool is on the right side. Put the unexposed film into the left chamber then lock the metal levers on the bottom of the camera. Pull the film toward the empty spool and fit tapered end into the slot; this will help hold the film. Rotate the film advance lever until the arrow on the film leader is aligned with the inside dot according to the size of film you are using. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading the Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After the frames are exposed continue to turn the winding crank a few extra times until there’s no more tension on the advance crank. At this point the protective paper of the film should be rolled up to the take-up spool. When unloading the film keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
Plug the flash with a flash cord into the X sync terminal. This will sync with 1/30th of a second and slower. Do not use Media Loan flashes in the FP sync terminal. This requires a special flash bulb. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Checking the Battery ====&lt;br /&gt;
To check the battery, press the white “Batt. Check” button on the back upper left of the camera. Above the button a red light will light up if the battery is good. If the battery is dead then bring it to Media Loan to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Focus ====&lt;br /&gt;
While looking through the viewfinder turn the focus ring until your subject comes into focus. An alternative way of setting the focus is to measure or estimate the distance from the camera to the subject and turn to that number of feet or meters on the focus ring.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Light Meter ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Pentax 6x7’s have a built in light meter. To turn on the light meter remove the lens cap. Set the exposure by rotating the aperture ring (f stop) of the lens until the needle is in the center position of the meter. It is always a good idea to have a separate light meter from the one in the camera as well.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting the ISO (Also called ASA) and shutter speed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Lift the outer ring on the shutter speed dial (left of the camera), and rotate it until the ASA/ISO number of your film is on the orange arrow. Set the shutter speed by turning the shutter speed dial. Generally you should use a tripod if the shutter speed is slower than 1/30th of a second, but it is recommended to use a tripod for 1/60th of a second and below due to mirror slap and shutter vibration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Lighting_Equipment_Guide&amp;diff=35948</id>
		<title>Lighting Equipment Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Lighting_Equipment_Guide&amp;diff=35948"/>
				<updated>2017-10-24T22:50:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* DRACAST LED */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:vimeo|187691086|600|center|Basic Lighting Concepts}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SAFETY==&lt;br /&gt;
Please exercise caution with all lighting equipment checked out from Media Loan.  The lights can get extremely hot and most require a lot of power. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====When using lighting equipment from Media Loan, ALWAYS:====&lt;br /&gt;
* Use gloves to protect your hands&lt;br /&gt;
* Tape down wires/cords to prevent tripping hazards&lt;br /&gt;
* Weigh down heavy stands with sandbags&lt;br /&gt;
* Plug lights into grounded outlets&lt;br /&gt;
* Use gloves/hand protection when changing lamps (bulbs)&lt;br /&gt;
* Wait for hot lights to cool down before packing them away (at least ten minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====DO NOT:====&lt;br /&gt;
Touch hot lights without proper hand protection&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Touch lamps (bulbs) with your bare hands (excluding fluorescent and LED)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Expose lights to water&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Expose lights to extreme weather/temperatures&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set a hot light on top of a gel&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Lamp (bulb) Changing====&lt;br /&gt;
It is extremely important that you never touch halogen lamps with your bare hands.  Your hands are covered in oils that, if they get on a lamp, will heat up and potentially cause explosions. To prevent this, you must cover your hands with proper gloves (available in APS) or a clean cloth.  Leather, or any type of &amp;quot;working&amp;quot; gloves, will suffice. Do not use latex.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The only type of bulbs you can safely touch with your bare hands are fluorescent and LED. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Every kit should come with spare replacement lamps in the case.  If you need help changing a lamp, please call APS (x5506) or stop by during open APS hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Know Your Circuits====&lt;br /&gt;
These lights require a lot of power.  Each house is divided into multiple circuits, as controlled by a circuit board, and each circuit has a capacity.  Overloading a circuit will cause a blow-out and potential damage. Use the formula below to calculate the wattage a circuit is capable of supporting, without accidents:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''AMPS x VOLTS = WATTS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common household plugs are typically 15-20 amps circuits.  Household voltage capacity is 110-120V, so for the purpose of this equation it's a good idea to round down to an even 100V to prevent any blow-outs. In an average house, each circuit is capable of supporting approximately 1500 Watts (15 x 100 = 1500).  This is a conservative estimate and will be different per location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LIGHTING EQUIPMENT IN APS==&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple options for lighting equipment in APS.  These kits do not require proficiencies, but as with all other APS checkouts, they do require an APS workorder.  APS equipment is typically restricted to students in media-centric classes/programs and ILC's/SOS's. Before requesting equipment from APS, please familiarize yourself with APS policies and procedures [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ARRILITE 3-LIGHT KITS===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:arri1.jpg|thumb|200px|right|Arri 1000W/650W]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:arri_open.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Arri 1000W/650W Open-Face]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3 per kit&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 650W or 1000W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors, Stands, Scrims&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Arri 3-Light Kits come with three open-face focusing flood lights of the same wattage (1000W '''or''' 650W). They are designed for a wide range of film and photographic lighting applications. Each kit comes with three barndoors, 3 stands, and scrims.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 1000W 3-Light kit provides beam angles of 65° in the flood position and 24° in the spot position. Each fixture will throw a beam of 695 footcandles 4.3 ft (1.4 m) in diameter, @ full spot, from a distance of 10 ft (3 m). It will provide a beam of 145 footcandles 13 ft (4m) in diameter @ full flood, from the same distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Arrlite 650 has a 7.25&amp;quot; open face and provides beam angles of 70° in the flood position, and 26° in the spot position. Each fixture will throw a beam of 450 footcandles 4.3 ft in diameter @ full spot, from a distance of 10 ft. It will provide a beam of 100 footcandles, 14 ft diameter @ full flood, from the same distance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ARRI SOFTKEY KIT===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:arri_soft.jpg|200px|left|thumb|Arri Softkey]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 2x650W (Fresnel), 1000W (Softbox)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors, Stands, Scrims, Fresnel Lenses&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This kit includes two 650W Fresnel lights and one 1000W Softbox. The 650W Fresnel lights have a focusable spotlight which can be adjusted via a knob on the back of the light (&amp;quot;spot&amp;quot; for a narrowly focused beam, or &amp;quot;flood&amp;quot; for a wide beam). The beam angle in the flood position is 52 degrees, and a narrow 14.5 degrees in the spot position. The 650W in this kit has a 4.3&amp;quot; low expansion, borosillicate fresnel lens which casts a soft, even illumination across the beam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The small size and light weight of the 1000W Softbox make it an excellent solution for a soft fill or key.  The Softbox has a narrow profile of only 5.5&amp;quot; deep, in which the light bounces off a reflector in the back of the instrument for indirect, even, soft light.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LOWEL CASELITES===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:caselite.jpg|200px|right|thumb|Lowel Caselite]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 55W/bulb, 110W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors, Stand, Cord, Eggcrate, Stand Arm, Stand Mount&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lowel Caselites are designed to offer beautiful, soft, easy to use fluorescents in a compact, location-friendly system. The current popularity of fluorescent lights in film &amp;amp; video production is well deserved. They offer soft and efficient light at several times the output of incandescent halogen sources.  These lights are ideal for interviews.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Caselites are compact, lightweight, rugged and completely self-contained without sacrificing output or light quality. The all-in-one Caselite is both light and case combined, and each one comes with a stand, eggcraft, cord, arm, and stand mount bracket. APS carries both 5300K (daylight) and 3000K (tungsten) compact fluorescent lamps.  Additional lamps can be checked out separately.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TEENIE-WEENIE MOLES / TEENIE MOLES / MICKEY MOLES===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 4 per kit&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity:&lt;br /&gt;
*Teenie-Weenie Mole: 600W&lt;br /&gt;
*Teenie Mole: 650W&lt;br /&gt;
*Mickey Mole: 1000W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: None (accessory kits available separately)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these kits contains four open-face, tungsten balanced, quartz instruments that have spot-flood adjustments. Also available with the Mickey Moles/Teenie Moles/Teenie Weenie Moles are stands and accessory kits which include barn doors, scrims, dichroic conversion filters (which will balance tungsten light color to approximate daylight), and filter holders. These kits should meet most of your heavy duty lighting needs. A separate stand kit is also needed to fully utilize these lights as none of them come with stands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:MickeyAccessories.jpg|Mole Accessories&lt;br /&gt;
File:teenie_mole.jpg|Mickey / Teenie Mole&lt;br /&gt;
File:teenie_weenie.jpg|Teenie Weenie Mole&lt;br /&gt;
File:TeenieWeenie.jpg|Moles&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:mini_mole.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Mini Mole]]&lt;br /&gt;
===MINI MOLES===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 4&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 200W &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Fresnel lenses, Desk Stands &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This kit contains four 200 watt tungsten balance instruments. The lights are small, have a fresnel lens, and come with snoots and aperture plates for better control of light. The inclusion of small desk stands make this kit perfect for 3D animation projects. The instruments can also be mounted on C-Stands for use in animation or as a small kick light hidden in a set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MOLEFAYS===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:1lightMolefay.jpg|One-Light Molefay&lt;br /&gt;
File:2lightMolefay.jpg|Two-Light Molefay&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: variable&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 650W/1300W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a good lighting instrument for outdoor use as a fill light when using the sun as a key light source because it is '''daylight balanced'''. Each kit is slightly different, one has 2-2 light Molefays, another has 1-2 light Molefays and accessories, and the third has 2-1 light Molefays and accessories. Each dichroic filtered lamp is rated at 605 watts and approximates 5,600 K daylight. Each kit requires separate light stands.&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:8tubeMolescent.jpg|150px|thumb|right|8-Tube Molescent]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===8-TUBE MOLESCENT===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 15W/bulb, 120W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Stand, Gel Holders&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a very large light and holds 8 total fluorescent bulbs.  The color temperature that we equip with the 8-Tube Molescent is CW (cool white).  Each bulb is 15W each, which equals a total output of 120W for this instrument. Four bulbs can be operated at a time, which allows for more control of the output (60W-120W).  The light this provides is diffuse and rather soft, and is a good instrument to match office or classroom lighting. Large frames for gels are provided with this light, as well as a wheeled junior-spud stand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===COLORTRAN 3-LIGHT KIT===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 2x500W (Mini-Lites), 750W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: 2 Stands, 2 Barndoors (Mini-Lites), 3 Gaffer Grip Clamps&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This kit comes with three lights: two Colortran Mini-Lites (500W), and one open-face instrument (750W). There are also three gaffer grip clamps and two stands. The clamps allow you to mount the lights to various surfaces and structures, which makes this kit very versatile. The Mini-Lites are very compact and are ideal for small sets.  Each light in this kit is capable of supporting up to 1000W lamps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:clamp.jpg|Gaffer Grip Clamp (3)&lt;br /&gt;
File:Colortranflood.JPG|Colortran 750W (1)&lt;br /&gt;
File:Minilite.jpg|Colortran Mini-Lite 500W (2)&lt;br /&gt;
File:Minilite2.jpg|Colortran Mini-Lite 500W (2)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2K BABY &amp;quot;ZIP&amp;quot; SOFTLITE===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:babysoftlite.jpg|200px|thumb|left|2K Baby Softlite]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 1000W/bulb, 2000W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: Barndoors&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Designed to fill the need for a small compact Softlight with high performance for locations and small sets where space is at a minimum.  All the light comes indirect and unobstructed from diffuse surfaces.  This instrument has two 1000W lamps and two switches to control them separately, allowing for 1000W or 2000W output.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Doublebroad.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Molequartz Double Broad]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===MOLEQUARTS DOUBLE BROAD===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 1000W/bulb, 2000W total&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instrument comes with two switchable 1000W lamps.  It provides soft, even fill light in a rectangular field with edge-to-edge and top-to-bottom uniformity.  The Double Broad can be used as a key or fill light source.  Separate stand required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===DRACAST LED===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:LED intensity.png|Dracast LED Light Intensity Chart&lt;br /&gt;
File:Dracast_LED.jpg|Dracast LED&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of Lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light Intensity: (see chart)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories available: barndoor, light cover, stand, diffusion kit.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dracast LED is an ideal choice for location work, interviews and small sets where color accuracy, control and flicker-free output are of major importance. Variable color temperature from 3,200K-5,600K means that you can quickly match the prevailing ambient or artificial light balance with a simple twist of a knob. Dimming is equally convenient via another knob that adjusts the light intensity from 100-0% with negligible color shift. This light has a low electricity draw of 60W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LIGHTING ACCESSORIES (APS)===&lt;br /&gt;
Lighting accessories in APS include:&lt;br /&gt;
* Light Stands (single &amp;amp; baby stand kits)&lt;br /&gt;
* Gels: Color and diffusion kits&lt;br /&gt;
* Bounce Discs&lt;br /&gt;
* Clothes Pins (C-47's): Used to attach gels to lights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Bounce Discs====&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Bounce.jpg|200px|thumb|right|5-in-one 42 &amp;quot; Bounce Disk]]&lt;br /&gt;
The 42&amp;quot; 5-in-1 Collapsible Reflector Disc from Raya is a versatile light modification tool than can find uses in the studio and on location. This disc provides white, silver, gold, and black surfaces as well as a one stop translucent diffusion panel. The tool allows you to quickly and easily make adjustments to your lighting in order to get the look you want. Also, the disc is able to fold down to 1/3 its size and be stored inside the included carrying bag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* White provides a neutral soft reflection useful for fill light&lt;br /&gt;
* Silver offers a neutral color balance similar to the white but with a higher contrast, increasing specular highlights&lt;br /&gt;
* Gold reflects a warmer light onto a subject, useful to enhancing skin tones or balancing a cool scene&lt;br /&gt;
* Black will block unwanted reflections and eliminate spill&lt;br /&gt;
* The translucent diffuser lessens light power by 1 stop and will help create a broader, softer light source that will wrap around your subject&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===GRIP===&lt;br /&gt;
====C-Stands and Gobo arms====&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Cstand.jpg|200px|thumb|right|C-Stand with Gobo Arm]]&lt;br /&gt;
A C-stand is primarily used to position light modifiers, such as silks, nets, or flags, in front of light sources. The stand is constructed of metal and consists of a collapsible base, two riser columns, and a baby pin on top. In addition, a C-stand includes a gobo head and a gobo arm, which provide the ability to articulate a light modifier without moving the stand itself. The legs of C stands are designed to be nested, so many stands can be placed around a light source. They can also be used to mount small light instruments, such as the Colortran Mini-Lite at APS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Flags====&lt;br /&gt;
Flags are used for controlling an lighting instrument. Flags are mounted onto C-Stands and placed in front of lights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Single flags available for checkout at APS include:&lt;br /&gt;
* Cutter (Black flag): This completely blocks lighting. Used for intentionally shaping light.&lt;br /&gt;
* Single Scrim (Green): Reduces the amount of light produced from an instrument by half of a stop.&lt;br /&gt;
* Double Scrim (Red): Reduces the amount of by one full stop.&lt;br /&gt;
* Silk (Yellow): Diffuses and greatly reduces the amount of light.&lt;br /&gt;
* Wooden Cucoloris (Cookie): Creates patterns by cutting shapes into it. Used to create background foliage, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cello Cucoloris (Cookie): Diffuses light and creates shapes. More subtle effects than the wooden cookie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Flag Kits (Lighting Control Kits)====&lt;br /&gt;
There are also flag kits available at APS.  These come with a cutter, single scrim, double scrim, and silk in a transportable bag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Additional Grip Gear====&lt;br /&gt;
* Apple Boxes: Used for propping various objects and subjects&lt;br /&gt;
* Gloves: Wear when handling hot lighting equipment, or changing bulbs&lt;br /&gt;
* Clamps: Used for various reasons, such as to attach gear to C-Stands&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LIGHTING EQUIPMENT IN GENERAL ACCESS (GA)==&lt;br /&gt;
The following equipment is available through General Access at Media Loan. They do not require an APS workorder or proficiency. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:lql.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Lowel Omni (LQL)]]&lt;br /&gt;
===LOWEL OMNI KIT (LQL)===&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 500W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: barndoors (3), stands (3), power cords (3), scrims (3), gel holders (3)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optional accessories: Umbrella kit (needs to be requested separately)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Lowel Omni kit (LQL) comes with three tungsten-balanced 500W lights.  The lights are useful as a key or back light. You can add an umbrella or diffusion to use them as a soft fill. Each light has a spot-flood adjustment. These lights get VERY hot - use caution when operating them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LOWEL PRO KIT (LQS)===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:lqs.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Lowel Pro (LQS)]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 250W&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: barndoors (3), stands (3), power cords (3), scrims (3), gel holders (3)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optional accessories: Umbrella kit (needs to be requested separately)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Lowel Pro kit (LQS) comes with three tungsten-balanced 250W lights. They are identical to the LQL kit, but are half the wattage. The LQS gives even light and can be used as a low-level key, accent, fill (with diffusion), or back light. Each light has a spot-flood adjustment. These lights get VERY hot - use caution when operating them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===GENARAY LED KIT===&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:led.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Genaray LED]]&lt;br /&gt;
Number of  lights: 2&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 1,700 lumens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: diffusion (2), power cords (2), stands (2)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optional accessories: battery pack (needs to be requested separately)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SpectroLED Essential 240 Bi-Color LED Light from Genaray is a compact light source with local dimming from 0-100%, a 60 degree flood beam angle and variable color balance from 3,200K tungsten to 5,600K daylight. This LED kit produces soft light, which can be made softer by attaching the included diffusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:led2.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Hot shoe LED (BESCOR FP-180)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===HOT SHOE LED (BESCOR FP-180)===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number of lights: 1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Light intensity: 200 lumens&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Accessories: tungsten diffusion&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bescor FP-180 is a camera-mountable light that is small and compact. It has 180 LED bulbs, 90 of which are tungsten and 90 daylight. The light has separate dimmer controls for the tungsten and daylight bulbs. This light can be used in tight spaces for extra illumination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LIGHTING ACCESSORIES (GA)===&lt;br /&gt;
* Bounce Disk (32&amp;quot; Impact Collapsible Circular Reflector Disc - Silver/White)&lt;br /&gt;
* Umbrella Kit (3, Silver/White)&lt;br /&gt;
* Gels (color packs)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=35662</id>
		<title>Canon Rebel Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_Rebel_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=35662"/>
				<updated>2017-10-02T20:56:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=== WRITTEN TEST ===&lt;br /&gt;
Answers may be found in the [[Canon Rebel XT / XSi Operating Guide]] and [[Canon Rebel T1i/T2i Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the shutter speed and where will you view the shutter speed settings?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you connect the camera to a computer via USB?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the icon for Aperture Priority?&lt;br /&gt;
# When setting the Mode Dial to Full Auto, what three exposure variables are set?&lt;br /&gt;
# Can you shoot B&amp;amp;W with a Rebel Camera?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you change white balance settings in the menu to obtain optimum color rendering?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you pull focus using the LDC screen and using?&lt;br /&gt;
# Name three things that might permanently damage this camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# If you check out a camera and it is lost, stolen or damaged, who is 100% responsible for the replacement costs of it?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ===&lt;br /&gt;
To be done during your scheduled proficiency.&lt;br /&gt;
* Remove the camera from the case and identify all controls and parts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Correctly identify the memory card.&lt;br /&gt;
* Set camera on tripod correctly and use the camera to record a couple of still images.&lt;br /&gt;
* Playback the still images.&lt;br /&gt;
* Describe the use of the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
* Set camera to manual focusing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate how to change the image resolution.&lt;br /&gt;
* Set up a battery to be charged.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pack the camera back in its case.&lt;br /&gt;
 [[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Gimbal_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=34692</id>
		<title>APS Gimbal Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Gimbal_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=34692"/>
				<updated>2017-07-03T19:31:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This is a restricted piece of equipment for advanced video students only. Students must be in an approved program for access to this equipment. [[APS Gimbal Proficiency Test|The gimbal also requires a proficiency.]]&lt;br /&gt;
==INTRO==&lt;br /&gt;
Handheld 3-axis gimbals are used in stabilization systems designed to give the camera operator the independence of handheld shooting without camera vibration or shake. Powered by three brushless motors, the gimbals have the ability to keep the camera level on all axes as the camera operator moves the camera. An inertial measurement unit (IMU) responds to movement and utilizes its three separate motors to stabilize the camera. With the guidance of algorithms, the stabilizer is able to notice the difference between deliberate movement such as pans and tracking shots from unwanted shake. This allows the camera to seem as if it is floating through the air. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CARE==&lt;br /&gt;
The gimbal at Media Loan is a complicated (and expensive!) piece of equipment that requires special attention and care. If not used and stored properly it can be permanently damaged. These potential damages may lead to accidents and hazards. Please use thorough care with this equipment. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALWAYS:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure all screws and locks are secured tightly before operation&lt;br /&gt;
*Store in a cool, dry place&lt;br /&gt;
*Only use handles to carry gimbal. &lt;br /&gt;
*Use the stand to set-up the gimbal for use&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure that the roll and pitch axis cables do not become tangled&lt;br /&gt;
*Properly balance the gimbal prior to operation&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NEVER:'''&lt;br /&gt;
*Expose to excessive heat, such as a furnace&lt;br /&gt;
*Store any items in the case besides those included in the kit&lt;br /&gt;
*Use excessive force with any of the parts&lt;br /&gt;
*Use in a location with strong static electricity&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the gimbal directly on a surface. You MUST use the stand.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use in the rain or non-dry weather&lt;br /&gt;
*Pick up the gimbal with any other part than the handles&lt;br /&gt;
*Force the gimbal to move when locked&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====BATTERY====&lt;br /&gt;
*Only use the included battery with this equipment&lt;br /&gt;
*Use only the included charger&lt;br /&gt;
*Do not overcharge (when fully charged, the indicator light will be solid green)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==CONTENTS==&lt;br /&gt;
*CAME-TV Argo Gimbal&lt;br /&gt;
*Battery &amp;amp; Charger with cables&lt;br /&gt;
*Stand&lt;br /&gt;
*Remote&lt;br /&gt;
*Tripod Adapter&lt;br /&gt;
* Micro USB &amp;amp; wall charger (for remote)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==BASIC GIMBAL MECHANICS==&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Gimbal_3_axes_rotation.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
The more you understand the mechanics of a gimbal, the easier it will be for you to use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3-AXIS===&lt;br /&gt;
There are three axes to this gimbal: the yaw, pitch, and roll. Imagine three lines running through a camera mounted on the gimbal and intersecting at the camera's center of gravity. The gimbal moves and adjusts on these axes to create smooth camera operation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Yaw:''' Rotation around the vertical axis. You can think of yaw movement as pivoting, or turning, the position of the camera horizontally.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pitch:''' Rotation around the side-to-side axis. You can think of pitch movement as up-and-down vertical tilting.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Roll:''' Rotation around the front-to-back axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==BALANCING==&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to operation, '''the gimbal must be properly balanced.''' If it's not, the gimbal will not function properly. '''Balanced''' means that the gimbal and camera is centered and leveled, with no part tilting up/down or to the side.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following steps, explained further below, to adjust the gimbal balance. '''DO NOT POWER ON THE BATTERY UNTIL AFTER BALANCING.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===6-POINT CALIBRATION===&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to calibration, first set the gimbal up on the stand and mount the camera onto the gimbal. Then, follow the 6-point calibration steps listed below.  &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will know the gimbal is balanced if it reverts back to center and level after manipulation. Test the balance by gently tilting the pitch and roll and making the gimbal moves back into the level position. Yaw is the only point that does not revert back as it is a freely-moving axis until the gimbal is powered on.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tip:''' Use a camera that has a programmed or built-in level, such as the Canon 6D from APS.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manipulate the following adjustments to achieve proper balance:&lt;br /&gt;
#Pitch axis horizontal (PAH)&lt;br /&gt;
#Pitch axis vertical (PAV) &lt;br /&gt;
#Row &lt;br /&gt;
#Rotation &lt;br /&gt;
#Roll axis &lt;br /&gt;
#Yaw axis&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each calibration adjustment affects the axes in different ways. We recommend that you follow this order, but you may find as you balance that you may need to re-adjust the different points as you go. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PITCH AXIS HORIZONTAL (PAH)====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''PAH''' is the orientation of the camera mount plate on the gimbal. As the name implies, the '''PAH''' affects the pitch (or up-down tilt) of the camera. You may need to move this forward or back, depending on the camera, if you wish to access the various input/outputs on the side of your camera. Do not mount the camera too far forward to too far back, try to find a position towards the center.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the '''PAH lock catch'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the camera forward or back to desired position&lt;br /&gt;
#Close the lock catch to secure the position of the '''mount plate'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====PITCH AXIS VERTICAL (PAV)====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''PAV''' is the position height of the camera. As the name implies, the PAV affects the pitch (or up-down tilt) of the camera. You will need to move the camera higher or lower to level the camera and eliminate up-down tilt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the two '''PAV lock catches'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#On both sides, use the '''PAV adjustment knobs''' to raise/lower the height of the camera. Set to a position in which the camera remains level.&lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure both sides are in a matched position on their prospective '''PAV scales'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Close the '''PAV lock catches'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' The best PAV position for the Canon 6D is the lowest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====ROW====&lt;br /&gt;
The row adjustment affects the roll axis and changes the horizontal positioning of the camera. Adjust the row to the left or right to eliminate side-to-side leaning of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Loosen the '''row lock knobs'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Adjust the camera to the left or right until level. Let go of camera to test leaning.&lt;br /&gt;
#Tighten the '''row lock knobs'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====ROTATION====&lt;br /&gt;
Rotation refers to the forward-backward leaning of the entire gimbal body. The '''spine''' of the body should be straight up and down. This adjustment re-distributes the weight of the gimbal along the '''neck'''. If there is a dip in the front of the gimbal, this means that the front is heavier, and this adjustment needs to be moved back. If there is a rise in the front, move this forward.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the '''rotation lock catch'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#Move the '''rotate knob''' forward or back until the spine is straight and there is no rise or dip in the front of the gimbal.&lt;br /&gt;
#Close the '''rotation lock catch'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====ROLL====&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''roll screw''' to change the roll adjustment if the camera is not able to roll freely. Do not over-tighten or over-loosen this screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====YAW====&lt;br /&gt;
The YAW can be set to any position prior to usage, but the standard set-up is for the '''neck''' to be perpendicular with the '''arm'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==REMOTE OPERATION==&lt;br /&gt;
The remote is necessary for operation of the gimbal. The three main functions of the remote are: &lt;br /&gt;
*Adjusting the desired set-up position of the gimbal&lt;br /&gt;
*Selecting the '''operation mode''' of the gimbal&lt;br /&gt;
*Performing camera movements (pan, tilt).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate the remote, use the '''power/mode button''' to turn the remote on/off as well as to select the desired '''operation mode''' of the gimbal. Use the '''joystick''' to control pitch and yaw of the gimbal for camera tilts and pans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====TO TURN ON/OFF==== &lt;br /&gt;
Press and the '''power/mode button''' for 3 seconds, or until the indicator light turns on/off. A '''green light''' means the battery is charged and the signal is normal. A '''slowly-flashing red light''' means the battery is getting low, and a '''quickly-flashing red light''' means the remote needs to be charged immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====OPERATION MODE &amp;amp; SELECTION====&lt;br /&gt;
After the remote is on, you can use the '''power/mode button''' to set the '''operation mode''' for the gimbal. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Before selecting a mode''' to use, set the gimbal in the desired position (after balancing!). The default position for most shooting situations is completely center and level. You may desire a different effect however, such as a slight tilt up/down. '''DO NOT CHANGE THE AXIS ADJUSTMENTS TO PLACE THE CAMERA IN AN ALTERNATE POSITION''', excluding yaw. Use only the remote to make these adjustments so as to not mess up the balance.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After positioning the gimbal, change the mode by pressing the '''power/mode button''' the following number of times:&lt;br /&gt;
# '''follow pitch, follow yaw.''' The gimbal will respond and adjust to new pitch and yaw positions as you move. This mode is ideal for a versatile subject/shot that needs quick adaptation.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''lock pitch, follow yaw.''' The gimbal will remain at the set pitch position, but you will will be able to adjust the yaw position as you move. This mode is ideal for a tracking shot around a corner.&lt;br /&gt;
# '''lock pitch, lock yaw.'''  The pitch and yaw positions will remain the locked. This mode is ideal for linear tracking shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====REMOTE CHARGING====&lt;br /&gt;
Charge the remote with the included power adaptor and cable. The remote needs 1.5 hours to fully charge and typically lasts for 8 hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==BATTERY OPERATION==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Check the power level:''' Quickly press the '''power button''' once. The light will indicate the power level.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To turn on:''' Quickly press the p'''ower button''' once, the indicator light will turn on. Press and hold the power button again and the battery will turn on. You'll know it's on when the lights stay lit and the gimbal beeps.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To turn off:''' Quickly press the '''power button''' once, the indicator light will flash. Press and hold the power button again until the lights turn off. You'll know it's off when you can freely move the axis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==TROUBLESHOOTING==&lt;br /&gt;
You may experience some issues when attempting to operate the gimbal, such as vibration and drifting. The most common cause of gimbal misbehavior is improper balancing. If you're experiencing these difficulties, use the various axis adjustments to properly, and completely, re-balance the gimbal. If the gimbal continues to misbehave, or is having an issue with battery/motor power, please ask for help from APS by stopping in or calling x5506 during open hours. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Digital_Voice_Recorders_Quick_Guide&amp;diff=33575</id>
		<title>Digital Voice Recorders Quick Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Digital_Voice_Recorders_Quick_Guide&amp;diff=33575"/>
				<updated>2017-04-13T21:54:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* Tips */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Great for recording conversations and lectures. No proficiency required!'''&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OLYMPUS WS100 RDV (MONO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OLYMPUS DS-30 RDO (STEREO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
SONY RDS (STEREO, MP3 files) - recommended for Mac users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files recorded with the Olympus Digital Recorders can be transcribed using ExpressScribe. [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/audio_olympusdvr.pdf Olympus Recorder with ExpressScribe PDF]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Suggested Recording Checklist for all Devices===&lt;br /&gt;
*Make a test recording prior to your scheduled interview to make sure you are comfortable using the recorder. Start with fresh batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a controlled and quiet recording location. Avoid noisy public locations (like restaurants, or areas near a road). If possible, eliminate background noises (turn off stereos, TV’s, fans, air circulation vents). A room with carpeting and furniture will typically sound better than one with hard floors (too much echo).&lt;br /&gt;
*Check record levels. Improve the quality of the recording by adjusting the mic placement either closer, or further away from the sound source. Wear headphones to monitor volume levels as well watch the volume meters on the recorder.  Ideal recordings will have clearly audible audio, while not being too loud so that it is distorted (going into &amp;quot;the red&amp;quot; on the audio recorder meters). What you hear is what you get. Shock mounts and stands are great to reduce mic handling noise.&lt;br /&gt;
*Confirm you are recording. Make sure the record light comes on, that the clock numbers are counting and audio levels are moving up and down.&lt;br /&gt;
*Tag the recording. Start each recording by stating the date, time, location, your name, and the name of your interviewee for proper archiving and cataloging of this work.&lt;br /&gt;
===Steps for Saving Files===&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy files from the audio recorder to a computer as you would from a USB drive. Protect the privacy of your recordings by deleting all files on the recorder before returning equipment to Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
*Backup the original audio files from the recorder to your program network drive. DO NOT USE SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN FILE NAMES (‘!#$*&amp;amp;%).&lt;br /&gt;
*When working with files in an audio editing program like Audacity, create a copy of the originals to be able to revert back if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
===Connecting Recorders to a PC/MAC===&lt;br /&gt;
*Before connecting one of the PC compatible devices, make sure power switch is OFF and the display is off. &lt;br /&gt;
*Then plug it into an open USB port. Computers will recognize the recorder as a removable disk drive. &lt;br /&gt;
*Files are saved onto the recorder in WMA format on Olympus recorders (a program which can read WMA files is required) and in lettered folders corresponding to the folder in which you recorded. &lt;br /&gt;
*When connected the recorder display will read “PC” When transferring data, the display will read “BUSY”. DO NOT disconnect the recorder when either message is displayed on the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*BEFORE DETACHING FROM COMPUTER - Remove the detachable device (Eject in Mac OS) and make sure the display is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
===Olympus WS100 RDV===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Head-On.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Back-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Top-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Operations====&lt;br /&gt;
Press and hold menu for 1 second or longer while recorder is stopped.&lt;br /&gt;
Press FF or REW to browse menu options, and PLAY to select an option or to close the menu hit the STOP button at any point. &lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the REC button to start recording &lt;br /&gt;
# Press STOP button to stop recording &lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FF or REW to choose the file you want to play &lt;br /&gt;
# Press PLAY button to start playback &lt;br /&gt;
# Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) button to select proper volume (Between 1-30)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Helpful Tip:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; To change the playback speed press PLAY to toggle between regular, slow, and fast.&lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
# To erase an individual file press the FOLDER button to choose a folder &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FF or REW button to choose the file you wnt to erase &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the ERASE button for less than 3 seconds ‘&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the ERASE button again (“DONE” blinks for two seconds and the deletion will be complete)&lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
*When using headphones while recoding or to listen to a recoding, the volume can be adjusted by pressing VOL (- +)&lt;br /&gt;
*To Pause press the REC button during recording; PAUSE will appear on the display and the recoding lamp flashes &lt;br /&gt;
*If a external microphone is desired, connect to headphone jack. Recommended external mics for this device are omnidirectional sound grabber, lavalier (MOT/MOE)&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible Issues====&lt;br /&gt;
*If full appears on the screen the device is out of memory. Erase unwanted files to make more room for new recordings. &lt;br /&gt;
*If recorder is stopped for 5 minutes, it will go on standby and the display will shut off. Recorder will also stop if left un-paused for 60 seconds. To exit standby mode press any button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Olympus DS-30 RDO===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Head-On.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Bottom-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Side-View-Other.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Operations==== &lt;br /&gt;
* Press the MENU button for 1 second or longer to open the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
* Menu items can be set during a recording or playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* Press the + or – button to scroll through the menu. Press the OK button to change the setting of the selected item.  Press the OK button to complete the setup screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* If the REW button is pressed, the setting will be canceled and it will return to the menu. Press the STOP button to close the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
====Power/Hold====&lt;br /&gt;
* Push the POWER/HOLD button up to initiate hold and down to turn recorder on. Push POWER/HOLD button down again to turn recorder off.&lt;br /&gt;
* When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause recording until hold is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording/Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press FOLDER button to select folder to record into. Use the +/- buttons to navigate to different folders. &lt;br /&gt;
# Once folder is selected, press the REC button the the right side to start recording .To pause, press REC button again. &lt;br /&gt;
# To play the recording back, select file and presss PLAY button the right side of the recorder. This is also where the STOP button is located. &lt;br /&gt;
====Recording Modes====&lt;br /&gt;
While the recorder is stopped, open the menu. Select “Rec Mode”. Choose from “ST XQ”, “ST HQ”, “HQ”, “SP” and “LP”. &lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
Select file within folder and press the orange ERASE button on the bottom left. &lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
* Mic sensitivity allows you to choose three different settings. Slide the MIC SENSE switch and select “LECTURE”, “CONF.”, “DICT.”. Lecture is the highest recording quality suitable for conferences with large crowds, or recording at a distance. Conference is suitable for meetings with small amount of people. Diction is the lowest recording sensitivity suitable for dictation. &lt;br /&gt;
* Voice filter is a function to cut low and high frequency tones during normal, fast, or slow playback, and enables clear audio playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* Noise cancel is a setting to use if audio is difficult to understand because of noisy surroundings. Menu options are high, low, and off and can be set while stopped or during playback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sony RDS===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Front-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Back-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Side-View-Other.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Functions====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the MENU/FOLDER button to open folder list. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use FF/REW buttons on side to scroll through list. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use the PLAY/STOP button on the side to select folder. &lt;br /&gt;
* HOLD button is on back of recorder. &lt;br /&gt;
** The HOLD button is also the POWER switch. Use it to turn the recorder on and off.&lt;br /&gt;
** When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause. &lt;br /&gt;
* Recording modes can be altered by using the mEnu and selecting either LOW or HIGH.&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording/Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Select folder to record into. &lt;br /&gt;
# When ready to record, press red circular button on the right side of the recorder. &lt;br /&gt;
# To pause recording, press the REC red button once again. &lt;br /&gt;
# To play back recoding, hit the STOP button on the side of the recorder which will put you back at the folder. Press the PLAY button to play back recording.&lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
# To erase files, select folder and file. Press the small red circular button on the left side to erase. &lt;br /&gt;
# Hold button down for 1 second or longer and file will be deleted. &lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
* DPC: When you slide the DPC (Digital PItch Control) switch to “ON”, you can adjust the playback speed between +200% and -75% of normal speed in the menu. The message is played back in natural tones by this function. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide the DPC switch to ON. &lt;br /&gt;
** Press and hold MENU button to enter menu. Use REW/FF buttons to select DPC then press PLAY. Press STOP to exit. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide switch to OFF poition to return to normal playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* NOISE CUT: When NOISE CUT switch is set to ON, the distortion of very low frequencies which are outside the human voice range is reduced, therefore you can hear the human voice more clearly. However, when you are using the built in speaker this function is not available. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide the NOISE CUT button to the ON/OFF position. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Recording time with different formats:  WAV 44/16 = 3 hours and 10 minutes of recording available | WAV 22/16 = 6 hours and 20 minutes of recording available.  MP3 192K = 23 hours of recording available | MP3 128K = 35 hours of recording available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Digital_Voice_Recorders_Quick_Guide&amp;diff=33574</id>
		<title>Digital Voice Recorders Quick Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Digital_Voice_Recorders_Quick_Guide&amp;diff=33574"/>
				<updated>2017-04-13T21:54:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* Tips */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Great for recording conversations and lectures. No proficiency required!'''&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OLYMPUS WS100 RDV (MONO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OLYMPUS DS-30 RDO (STEREO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
SONY RDS (STEREO, MP3 files) - recommended for Mac users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files recorded with the Olympus Digital Recorders can be transcribed using ExpressScribe. [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/audio_olympusdvr.pdf Olympus Recorder with ExpressScribe PDF]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Suggested Recording Checklist for all Devices===&lt;br /&gt;
*Make a test recording prior to your scheduled interview to make sure you are comfortable using the recorder. Start with fresh batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a controlled and quiet recording location. Avoid noisy public locations (like restaurants, or areas near a road). If possible, eliminate background noises (turn off stereos, TV’s, fans, air circulation vents). A room with carpeting and furniture will typically sound better than one with hard floors (too much echo).&lt;br /&gt;
*Check record levels. Improve the quality of the recording by adjusting the mic placement either closer, or further away from the sound source. Wear headphones to monitor volume levels as well watch the volume meters on the recorder.  Ideal recordings will have clearly audible audio, while not being too loud so that it is distorted (going into &amp;quot;the red&amp;quot; on the audio recorder meters). What you hear is what you get. Shock mounts and stands are great to reduce mic handling noise.&lt;br /&gt;
*Confirm you are recording. Make sure the record light comes on, that the clock numbers are counting and audio levels are moving up and down.&lt;br /&gt;
*Tag the recording. Start each recording by stating the date, time, location, your name, and the name of your interviewee for proper archiving and cataloging of this work.&lt;br /&gt;
===Steps for Saving Files===&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy files from the audio recorder to a computer as you would from a USB drive. Protect the privacy of your recordings by deleting all files on the recorder before returning equipment to Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
*Backup the original audio files from the recorder to your program network drive. DO NOT USE SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN FILE NAMES (‘!#$*&amp;amp;%).&lt;br /&gt;
*When working with files in an audio editing program like Audacity, create a copy of the originals to be able to revert back if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
===Connecting Recorders to a PC/MAC===&lt;br /&gt;
*Before connecting one of the PC compatible devices, make sure power switch is OFF and the display is off. &lt;br /&gt;
*Then plug it into an open USB port. Computers will recognize the recorder as a removable disk drive. &lt;br /&gt;
*Files are saved onto the recorder in WMA format on Olympus recorders (a program which can read WMA files is required) and in lettered folders corresponding to the folder in which you recorded. &lt;br /&gt;
*When connected the recorder display will read “PC” When transferring data, the display will read “BUSY”. DO NOT disconnect the recorder when either message is displayed on the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*BEFORE DETACHING FROM COMPUTER - Remove the detachable device (Eject in Mac OS) and make sure the display is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
===Olympus WS100 RDV===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Head-On.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Back-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Top-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Operations====&lt;br /&gt;
Press and hold menu for 1 second or longer while recorder is stopped.&lt;br /&gt;
Press FF or REW to browse menu options, and PLAY to select an option or to close the menu hit the STOP button at any point. &lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the REC button to start recording &lt;br /&gt;
# Press STOP button to stop recording &lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FF or REW to choose the file you want to play &lt;br /&gt;
# Press PLAY button to start playback &lt;br /&gt;
# Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) button to select proper volume (Between 1-30)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Helpful Tip:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; To change the playback speed press PLAY to toggle between regular, slow, and fast.&lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
# To erase an individual file press the FOLDER button to choose a folder &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FF or REW button to choose the file you wnt to erase &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the ERASE button for less than 3 seconds ‘&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the ERASE button again (“DONE” blinks for two seconds and the deletion will be complete)&lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
*When using headphones while recoding or to listen to a recoding, the volume can be adjusted by pressing VOL (- +)&lt;br /&gt;
*To Pause press the REC button during recording; PAUSE will appear on the display and the recoding lamp flashes &lt;br /&gt;
*If a external microphone is desired, connect to headphone jack. Recommended external mics for this device are omnidirectional sound grabber, lavalier (MOT/MOE)&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible Issues====&lt;br /&gt;
*If full appears on the screen the device is out of memory. Erase unwanted files to make more room for new recordings. &lt;br /&gt;
*If recorder is stopped for 5 minutes, it will go on standby and the display will shut off. Recorder will also stop if left un-paused for 60 seconds. To exit standby mode press any button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Olympus DS-30 RDO===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Head-On.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Bottom-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Side-View-Other.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Operations==== &lt;br /&gt;
* Press the MENU button for 1 second or longer to open the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
* Menu items can be set during a recording or playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* Press the + or – button to scroll through the menu. Press the OK button to change the setting of the selected item.  Press the OK button to complete the setup screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* If the REW button is pressed, the setting will be canceled and it will return to the menu. Press the STOP button to close the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
====Power/Hold====&lt;br /&gt;
* Push the POWER/HOLD button up to initiate hold and down to turn recorder on. Push POWER/HOLD button down again to turn recorder off.&lt;br /&gt;
* When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause recording until hold is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording/Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press FOLDER button to select folder to record into. Use the +/- buttons to navigate to different folders. &lt;br /&gt;
# Once folder is selected, press the REC button the the right side to start recording .To pause, press REC button again. &lt;br /&gt;
# To play the recording back, select file and presss PLAY button the right side of the recorder. This is also where the STOP button is located. &lt;br /&gt;
====Recording Modes====&lt;br /&gt;
While the recorder is stopped, open the menu. Select “Rec Mode”. Choose from “ST XQ”, “ST HQ”, “HQ”, “SP” and “LP”. &lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
Select file within folder and press the orange ERASE button on the bottom left. &lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
* Mic sensitivity allows you to choose three different settings. Slide the MIC SENSE switch and select “LECTURE”, “CONF.”, “DICT.”. Lecture is the highest recording quality suitable for conferences with large crowds, or recording at a distance. Conference is suitable for meetings with small amount of people. Diction is the lowest recording sensitivity suitable for dictation. &lt;br /&gt;
* Voice filter is a function to cut low and high frequency tones during normal, fast, or slow playback, and enables clear audio playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* Noise cancel is a setting to use if audio is difficult to understand because of noisy surroundings. Menu options are high, low, and off and can be set while stopped or during playback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sony RDS===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Front-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Back-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Side-View-Other.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Functions====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the MENU/FOLDER button to open folder list. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use FF/REW buttons on side to scroll through list. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use the PLAY/STOP button on the side to select folder. &lt;br /&gt;
* HOLD button is on back of recorder. &lt;br /&gt;
** The HOLD button is also the POWER switch. Use it to turn the recorder on and off.&lt;br /&gt;
** When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause. &lt;br /&gt;
* Recording modes can be altered by using the mEnu and selecting either LOW or HIGH.&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording/Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Select folder to record into. &lt;br /&gt;
# When ready to record, press red circular button on the right side of the recorder. &lt;br /&gt;
# To pause recording, press the REC red button once again. &lt;br /&gt;
# To play back recoding, hit the STOP button on the side of the recorder which will put you back at the folder. Press the PLAY button to play back recording.&lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
# To erase files, select folder and file. Press the small red circular button on the left side to erase. &lt;br /&gt;
# Hold button down for 1 second or longer and file will be deleted. &lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
* DPC: When you slide the DPC (Digital PItch Control) switch to “ON”, you can adjust the playback speed between +200% and -75% of normal speed in the menu. The message is played back in natural tones by this function. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide the DPC switch to ON. &lt;br /&gt;
** Press and hold MENU button to enter menu. Use REW/FF buttons to select DPC then press PLAY. Press STOP to exit. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide switch to OFF poition to return to normal playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* NOISE CUT: When NOISE CUT switch is set to ON, the distortion of very low frequencies which are outside the human voice range is reduced, therefore you can hear the human voice more clearly. However, when you are using the built in speaker this function is not available. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide the NOISE CUT button to the ON/OFF position. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Recording time with different formats:  WAV 44/16 = 3 hours and 10 minutes of recording available.  WAV 22/16 = 6 hours and 20 minutes of recording available.  MP3 192K = 23 hours of recording available.  MP3 128K = 35 hours of recording available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Digital_Voice_Recorders_Quick_Guide&amp;diff=33573</id>
		<title>Digital Voice Recorders Quick Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Digital_Voice_Recorders_Quick_Guide&amp;diff=33573"/>
				<updated>2017-04-13T21:50:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''Great for recording conversations and lectures. No proficiency required!'''&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OLYMPUS WS100 RDV (MONO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
OLYMPUS DS-30 RDO (STEREO, WMA files) - recommended for PC users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
SONY RDS (STEREO, MP3 files) - recommended for Mac users&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Files recorded with the Olympus Digital Recorders can be transcribed using ExpressScribe. [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/docs/audio_olympusdvr.pdf Olympus Recorder with ExpressScribe PDF]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Suggested Recording Checklist for all Devices===&lt;br /&gt;
*Make a test recording prior to your scheduled interview to make sure you are comfortable using the recorder. Start with fresh batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a controlled and quiet recording location. Avoid noisy public locations (like restaurants, or areas near a road). If possible, eliminate background noises (turn off stereos, TV’s, fans, air circulation vents). A room with carpeting and furniture will typically sound better than one with hard floors (too much echo).&lt;br /&gt;
*Check record levels. Improve the quality of the recording by adjusting the mic placement either closer, or further away from the sound source. Wear headphones to monitor volume levels as well watch the volume meters on the recorder.  Ideal recordings will have clearly audible audio, while not being too loud so that it is distorted (going into &amp;quot;the red&amp;quot; on the audio recorder meters). What you hear is what you get. Shock mounts and stands are great to reduce mic handling noise.&lt;br /&gt;
*Confirm you are recording. Make sure the record light comes on, that the clock numbers are counting and audio levels are moving up and down.&lt;br /&gt;
*Tag the recording. Start each recording by stating the date, time, location, your name, and the name of your interviewee for proper archiving and cataloging of this work.&lt;br /&gt;
===Steps for Saving Files===&lt;br /&gt;
*Copy files from the audio recorder to a computer as you would from a USB drive. Protect the privacy of your recordings by deleting all files on the recorder before returning equipment to Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
*Backup the original audio files from the recorder to your program network drive. DO NOT USE SPECIAL CHARACTERS IN FILE NAMES (‘!#$*&amp;amp;%).&lt;br /&gt;
*When working with files in an audio editing program like Audacity, create a copy of the originals to be able to revert back if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
===Connecting Recorders to a PC/MAC===&lt;br /&gt;
*Before connecting one of the PC compatible devices, make sure power switch is OFF and the display is off. &lt;br /&gt;
*Then plug it into an open USB port. Computers will recognize the recorder as a removable disk drive. &lt;br /&gt;
*Files are saved onto the recorder in WMA format on Olympus recorders (a program which can read WMA files is required) and in lettered folders corresponding to the folder in which you recorded. &lt;br /&gt;
*When connected the recorder display will read “PC” When transferring data, the display will read “BUSY”. DO NOT disconnect the recorder when either message is displayed on the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*BEFORE DETACHING FROM COMPUTER - Remove the detachable device (Eject in Mac OS) and make sure the display is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
===Olympus WS100 RDV===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Head-On.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Back-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:WS-100-Top-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Operations====&lt;br /&gt;
Press and hold menu for 1 second or longer while recorder is stopped.&lt;br /&gt;
Press FF or REW to browse menu options, and PLAY to select an option or to close the menu hit the STOP button at any point. &lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the REC button to start recording &lt;br /&gt;
# Press STOP button to stop recording &lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FOLDER button to choose folder&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FF or REW to choose the file you want to play &lt;br /&gt;
# Press PLAY button to start playback &lt;br /&gt;
# Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) button to select proper volume (Between 1-30)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Helpful Tip:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; To change the playback speed press PLAY to toggle between regular, slow, and fast.&lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
# To erase an individual file press the FOLDER button to choose a folder &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the FF or REW button to choose the file you wnt to erase &lt;br /&gt;
# Press the ERASE button for less than 3 seconds ‘&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the ERASE button again (“DONE” blinks for two seconds and the deletion will be complete)&lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
*When using headphones while recoding or to listen to a recoding, the volume can be adjusted by pressing VOL (- +)&lt;br /&gt;
*To Pause press the REC button during recording; PAUSE will appear on the display and the recoding lamp flashes &lt;br /&gt;
*If a external microphone is desired, connect to headphone jack. Recommended external mics for this device are omnidirectional sound grabber, lavalier (MOT/MOE)&lt;br /&gt;
====Possible Issues====&lt;br /&gt;
*If full appears on the screen the device is out of memory. Erase unwanted files to make more room for new recordings. &lt;br /&gt;
*If recorder is stopped for 5 minutes, it will go on standby and the display will shut off. Recorder will also stop if left un-paused for 60 seconds. To exit standby mode press any button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Olympus DS-30 RDO===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Head-On.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Bottom-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:DS-30-Side-View-Other.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Operations==== &lt;br /&gt;
* Press the MENU button for 1 second or longer to open the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
* Menu items can be set during a recording or playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* Press the + or – button to scroll through the menu. Press the OK button to change the setting of the selected item.  Press the OK button to complete the setup screen. &lt;br /&gt;
* If the REW button is pressed, the setting will be canceled and it will return to the menu. Press the STOP button to close the menu. &lt;br /&gt;
====Power/Hold====&lt;br /&gt;
* Push the POWER/HOLD button up to initiate hold and down to turn recorder on. Push POWER/HOLD button down again to turn recorder off.&lt;br /&gt;
* When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause recording until hold is turned off.&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording/Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press FOLDER button to select folder to record into. Use the +/- buttons to navigate to different folders. &lt;br /&gt;
# Once folder is selected, press the REC button the the right side to start recording .To pause, press REC button again. &lt;br /&gt;
# To play the recording back, select file and presss PLAY button the right side of the recorder. This is also where the STOP button is located. &lt;br /&gt;
====Recording Modes====&lt;br /&gt;
While the recorder is stopped, open the menu. Select “Rec Mode”. Choose from “ST XQ”, “ST HQ”, “HQ”, “SP” and “LP”. &lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
Select file within folder and press the orange ERASE button on the bottom left. &lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
* Mic sensitivity allows you to choose three different settings. Slide the MIC SENSE switch and select “LECTURE”, “CONF.”, “DICT.”. Lecture is the highest recording quality suitable for conferences with large crowds, or recording at a distance. Conference is suitable for meetings with small amount of people. Diction is the lowest recording sensitivity suitable for dictation. &lt;br /&gt;
* Voice filter is a function to cut low and high frequency tones during normal, fast, or slow playback, and enables clear audio playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* Noise cancel is a setting to use if audio is difficult to understand because of noisy surroundings. Menu options are high, low, and off and can be set while stopped or during playback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sony RDS===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Front-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Back-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Side-View.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
File:Sony-Side-View-Other.jpg|&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Basic Menu Functions====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the MENU/FOLDER button to open folder list. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use FF/REW buttons on side to scroll through list. &lt;br /&gt;
# Use the PLAY/STOP button on the side to select folder. &lt;br /&gt;
* HOLD button is on back of recorder. &lt;br /&gt;
** The HOLD button is also the POWER switch. Use it to turn the recorder on and off.&lt;br /&gt;
** When in hold, all functions will remain as they are set. For example, if hold is on when recording, you cannot stop or pause. &lt;br /&gt;
* Recording modes can be altered by using the mEnu and selecting either LOW or HIGH.&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording/Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
# Select folder to record into. &lt;br /&gt;
# When ready to record, press red circular button on the right side of the recorder. &lt;br /&gt;
# To pause recording, press the REC red button once again. &lt;br /&gt;
# To play back recoding, hit the STOP button on the side of the recorder which will put you back at the folder. Press the PLAY button to play back recording.&lt;br /&gt;
====Erasing Files====&lt;br /&gt;
# To erase files, select folder and file. Press the small red circular button on the left side to erase. &lt;br /&gt;
# Hold button down for 1 second or longer and file will be deleted. &lt;br /&gt;
====Tips====&lt;br /&gt;
* DPC: When you slide the DPC (Digital PItch Control) switch to “ON”, you can adjust the playback speed between +200% and -75% of normal speed in the menu. The message is played back in natural tones by this function. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide the DPC switch to ON. &lt;br /&gt;
** Press and hold MENU button to enter menu. Use REW/FF buttons to select DPC then press PLAY. Press STOP to exit. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide switch to OFF poition to return to normal playback. &lt;br /&gt;
* NOISE CUT: When NOISE CUT switch is set to ON, the distortion of very low frequencies which are outside the human voice range is reduced, therefore you can hear the human voice more clearly. However, when you are using the built in speaker this function is not available. &lt;br /&gt;
** Slide the NOISE CUT button to the ON/OFF position. &lt;br /&gt;
in WAV 44/16 = 3 hours and 10 minutes of recording available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=32018</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=32018"/>
				<updated>2016-11-28T19:28:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* Overdubbing */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|the written portion of the test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test will take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Scroll Wheel====&lt;br /&gt;
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic&lt;br /&gt;
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connection Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Interview Set Up=====&lt;br /&gt;
'''While filming:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L/R input mic: Main subject &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Concert Set Up=====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Concert recording:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L/R input mic: Performance on stage &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
This recording option will only work with external microphones. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The X/Y and DS mic capsules will not work with the overdubbing mode.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31965</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31965"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:30:33Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|the written portion of the test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test will take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Scroll Wheel====&lt;br /&gt;
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic&lt;br /&gt;
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Connection Examples====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n allows you to record in a variety of configurations.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Interview Set Up=====&lt;br /&gt;
'''While filming:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L/R input mic: Main subject &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Shotgun/lapel mics connected to Inputs 1/2: Performer &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Ambient sound &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Interview setting H6n.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Concert Set Up=====&lt;br /&gt;
'''Concert recording:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
L/R input mic: Performance on stage &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Inputs 1/2: Line outputs from mixer &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Mics connected to Inputs 3/4: Audience sound &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Concert setup H6n.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31964</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31964"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:25:08Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* MS Microphone */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|the written portion of the test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test will take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Scroll Wheel====&lt;br /&gt;
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg|MS Mic&lt;br /&gt;
File:MS mic.png|MS Mic&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31963</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31963"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:24:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* XY Microphone */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|the written portion of the test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test will take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Scroll Wheel====&lt;br /&gt;
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
File:XY mic.png|XY Mic&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Concert_setup_H6n.png&amp;diff=31962</id>
		<title>File:Concert setup H6n.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Concert_setup_H6n.png&amp;diff=31962"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:22:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Interview_setting_H6n.png&amp;diff=31961</id>
		<title>File:Interview setting H6n.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Interview_setting_H6n.png&amp;diff=31961"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:21:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MS_mic.png&amp;diff=31960</id>
		<title>File:MS mic.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MS_mic.png&amp;diff=31960"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:20:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:XY_mic.png&amp;diff=31959</id>
		<title>File:XY mic.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:XY_mic.png&amp;diff=31959"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:20:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31958</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31958"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:15:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|the written portion of the test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test will take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Scroll Wheel====&lt;br /&gt;
Just like in the previous model, the Zoom H6n uses a scroll wheel to navigate through the menus.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To navigate up and down, gently push up and down the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To validate your option choices (in this article we refer to it as&amp;quot;OK&amp;quot;), PRESS DOWN on the scroll wheel.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Scroll wheel.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Scroll_wheel.gif&amp;diff=31957</id>
		<title>File:Scroll wheel.gif</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Scroll_wheel.gif&amp;diff=31957"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:14:46Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31955</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31955"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:07:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|the written portion of the test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test will take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31954</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31954"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:07:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|the written portion of the test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test will take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31951</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31951"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:03:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test|A proficiency test]] is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide|the operating guide]] and complete the written portion of the test prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=31949</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=31949"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T20:02:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;====WRITTEN TEST====&lt;br /&gt;
Answers may be found in the [[Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide]]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the point of formatting the SD card before you record audio?&lt;br /&gt;
# What are the steps you take in order to format the SD card correctly?&lt;br /&gt;
# Name the different microphone inputs options on this recorder?&lt;br /&gt;
# In what setting would you use the MS and the XY Microphones ?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you set the recording format?&lt;br /&gt;
# What format should you choose for a high quality recording and why?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is &amp;quot;Back Up Recording&amp;quot;?&lt;br /&gt;
# What are the different types of batteries you can insert in the Zoom H6n recorder?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you use this recorder as an audio interface?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility when you checkout equipment from Media Loan?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ====&lt;br /&gt;
(TO BE DONE DURING YOUR SCHEDULED APPOINTMENT )&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the recorder on.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to navigate through the menus of recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
# Format the SD card correctly and prepare for recording.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug/Unplug the XY mic correctly input.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug an XRL mic to correct input.&lt;br /&gt;
# Record 30 seconds of audio.&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect headphones and playback your recording.&lt;br /&gt;
# Erase track.&lt;br /&gt;
# Show that you understand how to import your audio files from the recorder to the computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31948</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31948"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:12:00Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* Setting The Recording Format */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the test prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31947</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31947"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:11:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* Setting The Recording Format */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the test prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu and use scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTES:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31946</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31946"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:09:41Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: /* Setting The Recording Format */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the test prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format.png| Recording Format Quality Chart&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTES:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the WAV format for recording high-quality audio.&lt;br /&gt;
* The MP3 format reduces file size through compression, which also reduces the audio quality. Use this format if you need to conserve space on the SD card to store many recordings, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* When recording in MP3 format, a single stereo MP3 file will be created regardless of the number of tracks selected. You can use the monitoring mixer to adjust the balance of all the tracks in the stereo mix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31945</id>
		<title>APS/AS Zoom H6n Audio Recorder Operating Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS/AS_Zoom_H6n_Audio_Recorder_Operating_Guide&amp;diff=31945"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:07:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Zoom H6 Accessories.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6 right view.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A proficiency test is required to check out this Audio Recorder. Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of APS, [https://forms.evergreen.edu/aps-proficiency here], or by calling APS 360-867-5506 during [http://www.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps.htm APS operation hours]. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the test prior to your scheduled proficiency. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Bring your answer sheet with you to the test. The proficiency test should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This operating guide is not a substitute for the complete manual, which you can download here: [https://www.zoom.co.jp/sites/default/files/products/downloads/pdfs/E_H6v2.pdf Zoom H6n Manual]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
The ZOOM H6N is a versatile and extremely portable 6 track field recorder for use in the field for sound collection, studio recording, and audio for video shoots. The H6N comes with one XY stereo field microphone and a cardioid mono capsule. Both of these capsules fit on the top slot on the recorder. There are also 4 XLR/Line in ports, each with their own individual volume, pad controls, and phantom power (+12V/ +24V/ +48V). It also features a headphone out jack and a 3.5mm line out jack that can hook up directly to a DSLR camera. Finally, the recorder features a metronome, chromatic tuner, and playback speed/pitch adjustments.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Safety Precaution &amp;amp; Care===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to severe impacts or prolonged vibrations.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to extreme temperatures. Drastic temperature changes cause a condensation build up in electronics.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT subject the recorder to water, sand, or mud.''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT use excessive force when operating this equipment.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Do NOT drop the equipment!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Always turn the power off before inserting or removing an SD card.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Removing card while power is on may result in loss of data!'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When inserting an SD card, be sure to insert the correct end with the top side up as shown.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''When an SD card is not loaded, recording and playback are not possible.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;'''YOU ARE 100% FINANCIALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS EQUIPMENT UPON CHECKOUT!!!!'''&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Front diagram.jpg|Front View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Right diagram.jpg|Right View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Left diagram.jpg|Left View&lt;br /&gt;
File:Bottom diagram.jpg|Bottom View&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Power===&lt;br /&gt;
====Using Batteries====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6n uses alkaline batteries or nickel metal hydride batteries.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Replace batteries H6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''To place/replace batteries:'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then remove the battery.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
# Install the batteries.&lt;br /&gt;
# Replace the battery cover.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the correct type of battery you are using (Menu &amp;gt;&amp;gt; System &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Battery &amp;gt;&amp;gt; Alkaline or Ni-Mh)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If the battery indicator becomes empty, turn the power off immediately and install new batteries. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Using an AC adapter====&lt;br /&gt;
#Connect a USB cable to the USB jack.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Plug the adapter into an outlet.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operations===&lt;br /&gt;
====Attachable Microphone Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
The Zoom H6N kit comes with two attachable microphones, one is a stereo XY microphone and the other is a cardioid capsule, each has a L/R output. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====XY Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n YX mic.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Has two crossing directional microphones which can be set for either 90 degrees or 120 degrees, dependent upon the field you wish to capture. Best for close/medium range recording (chamber music, live concert, interview, field recording, etc).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====MS Microphone=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Zoom H6n MS mic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This microphone has a unidirectional mid-range microphone for central recording capture and a bidirectional microphone build in that can be adjusted to change the stereo field. This mic can capture a fairly accurate and crisp stereo field. Best for mono recording (interviews, narrations, and meetings).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting and Disconnecting Attachable Microphones======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Connection'''&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the protective caps from the H6 main unit and the microphone. &lt;br /&gt;
# While Pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, connect it to the main unit, inserting the connector completely. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Disconnection'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# While pressing the buttons on the sides of the mic, pull it gently out of the main unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT SUBJECT THESE MICROPHONES TO HARSH TEMPERATURES, EXTREME WEATHER, OR IMPACT!!!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
======Connecting External Microphones/ Other Devices to Inputs 1-4======&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting External Microphones'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect dynamic and condenser microphones to the Input 1-4 XLR jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a Condenser Microphone without dedicated power, set the onboard phantom power to (+12V/+24V/+48V)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Connecting instruments/ Other devices'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Connect keyboards and mixers directly in the input 1-4 TRS jacks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Direct input of passive guitars and basses is not supported.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Set PAD to -20dB when connecting a mixer or other device with standard output level. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''* Stereo Inputs'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By linking tracks 1 and 2 (tracks 3 and 4) as stereo tracks, these can be used as stereo inputs. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, input 1 and 3 become the left channels and 2 and 4 become the right channels. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Turning the Device On/Off====&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn On'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button to the right (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To Turn Off'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Slide the hold button the right again (Where the power symbol is).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting Date and Time====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SYSTEM” and press the scroll wheel down.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel, selected “Date/Time”, and press the scroll wheel down. &lt;br /&gt;
# Set date and time!&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button again to return to the home screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setting The Recording Format====&lt;br /&gt;
Set the format according to the desired audio quality and file size.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press Menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use Scroll wheel to select “REC”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Use Scroll wheel to select “Rec Format”, and press OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use Scroll wheel to select the desired format, and press  OK.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 1.png|Recording Format Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 2.png|Recording Format Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:Recording Format 3.png| Recording Format Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Display Overview====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Home Recording Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Home recording screen.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Playback Screen=====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback screen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Loading an SD Card====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the power off and then open the SD card slot cover. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Insert card into the slot. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To eject an SD card: Push the card further into the slot and then pull it out. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Formatting SD Cards====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press down on the wheel. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Using the wheel to select “SD CARD Remain” and press the scroll wheel button to see the amount of remaining open space on a card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To being the formatting process, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “SD CARD” and press the scroll button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Format” and press the scroll wheel button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Yes” and press down on the scroll wheel to format the SD card. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recording====&lt;br /&gt;
When recording with the Zoom H6n Audio Recorder, the following file structure/folders and files are created on the SD card:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screen Shot 2016-11-21 at 3.11.48 PM.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Automatic=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press the scroll button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Auto Rec” and press the button down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select on/off and press the button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press the button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Return to the Home Screen, and press the record button and put the recorder in standby. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button again to exit standby and stop recording.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Pre-Record=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Pre-Rec” and press the scroll button down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Back Up Recording=====&lt;br /&gt;
When using the L/R input, in addition to the recording at the set input level, the recorder can also record a separate file at a level 12dB below. This backup can be used if the recording level was set too high, causing distortion, for example. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording1.png|BackUp Recording Step 1&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording2.png|BackUp Recording Step 2&lt;br /&gt;
File:BackUpRecording3.png|BackUp Recording Step 3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “REC” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “Backup Rec” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “On” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
HINT: If the name of the original file is, for example, “ZOOM0001_LR.wav”, the name of the backup file will be “ZOOM0001_BU.wav”. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Overdubbing=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll to select “Overdub” and press Ok. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the track button until the indicator lights red for the track to be overdubbed. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the volume knob to make adjustments.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To monitor already recorded tracks, press their track buttons so their indicators light green.  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to begin recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the record button to stop recording. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button to stop overdubbing. When you play back or edit an overdubbed project, the last selected take will be used. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Playback====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal Playback=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT LIST”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select desired folder and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select the desired project and press Ok. Playback will begin.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Changing Playback Speed=====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Playback Speed” and press Ok,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust playback speed, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File Management===&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Project====&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete one project, press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “PROJECT MENU”, Press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Trash” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Delete” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# To delete all projects in a folder, select “Delete All Projects” instead, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Note: Deletion of a project cannot be reversed!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File Transfers====&lt;br /&gt;
# Press menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “SD Card Reader” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer using a USB cable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure to safely disconnect the H6N from the computer when finished to avoid damage to the files and the recorder!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the H6N Recorder as an Audio Interface===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use scroll wheel to select “USB” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Audio Interface” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either “Stereo Mix” or “Multi Track” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select either: “PC/Mac”, “PC/MAC using battery power” or “iPad using battery power”, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Connect the H6N to the computer or iPad using a USB cable. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu to disconnect. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “EXIT” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Yes” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Disconnect the cable from the computer or iPad and the H6, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===H6N Chromatic Tuner===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL”, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tuner” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select preferred tuning type and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to adjust standard pitch.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# For all tuner types besides chromatic, use the forward and rewind button to change pitch (For drop tuning)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Press a track button to select input to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the tuner according to the type. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Chromatic: shows pitch inaccuracies and note that the device is detecting.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Guitar/Bass Tuning: The number of strings being tuned is automatically detected, allowing for tuning one at a time. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using the Metronome===&lt;br /&gt;
# Press the menu button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select “TOOL” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Metronome” and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the scroll wheel to select a menu item, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Click”, use the scroll wheel to set when the metronome is active, and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Precount”.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Tempo”. Use the scroll wheel to select the speed, and press the menu button. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Sound”. Use the scroll wheel to set the sound and press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Pattern” use the scroll wheel to select desired musical pattern.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select “Level” and set to desired volume, press Ok.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format_3.png&amp;diff=31944</id>
		<title>File:Recording Format 3.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format_3.png&amp;diff=31944"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:05:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format_2.png&amp;diff=31943</id>
		<title>File:Recording Format 2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format_2.png&amp;diff=31943"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:05:29Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format_1.png&amp;diff=31942</id>
		<title>File:Recording Format 1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format_1.png&amp;diff=31942"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:05:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format.png&amp;diff=31939</id>
		<title>File:Recording Format.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format.png&amp;diff=31939"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:03:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: Valeram uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:Recording Format.png&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format.png&amp;diff=31938</id>
		<title>File:Recording Format.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Recording_Format.png&amp;diff=31938"/>
				<updated>2016-11-22T19:03:19Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Valeram: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Valeram</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>